| 1 | greg | 1.20 | .\" RCSid "$Id$" | 
| 2 | greg | 1.1 | .nr PS 11 | 
| 3 |  |  | .ps 11 | 
| 4 |  |  | .nr VS 12 | 
| 5 |  |  | .vs 12 | 
| 6 |  |  | .nr PD .5v | 
| 7 |  |  | .ds LF MGF | 
| 8 | greg | 1.13 | .ds RF Version 1.1 | 
| 9 |  |  | .\" !Remember to update date on each modification! | 
| 10 |  |  | .DA February 1996 | 
| 11 | greg | 1.1 | .TL | 
| 12 |  |  | The Materials and Geometry Format | 
| 13 |  |  | .AU | 
| 14 |  |  | Greg Ward | 
| 15 |  |  | .br | 
| 16 |  |  | Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory | 
| 17 |  |  | .NH | 
| 18 |  |  | Introduction | 
| 19 |  |  | .LP | 
| 20 |  |  | The Materials and Geometry Format (referred to henceforth as MGF) | 
| 21 |  |  | is a description language for 3-dimensional environments expressly | 
| 22 |  |  | suited to visible light simulation and rendering. | 
| 23 |  |  | The materials are physically-based and rely on standard and | 
| 24 |  |  | well-accepted definitions of color, reflectance and transmittance | 
| 25 |  |  | for good accuracy and reproducibility. | 
| 26 |  |  | The geometry is based on boundary representation using simple | 
| 27 |  |  | geometric primitives such as polygons, spheres and cones. | 
| 28 |  |  | The file format itself is terse but human-readable ASCII text. | 
| 29 |  |  | .NH 2 | 
| 30 |  |  | What makes MGF special? | 
| 31 |  |  | .LP | 
| 32 |  |  | There are three principal reasons to use MGF as an input language for | 
| 33 |  |  | lighting simulation and physically-based rendering: | 
| 34 |  |  | .RS | 
| 35 |  |  | .IP 1. | 
| 36 |  |  | It's the only existing format that describes materials physically. | 
| 37 |  |  | .IP 2. | 
| 38 |  |  | It is endorsed by the Illuminating Engineering Society of North | 
| 39 |  |  | America (IESNA) as part of their LM-63-1995 standard for luminaire data. | 
| 40 |  |  | .IP 3. | 
| 41 |  |  | It's easy and fun to support since it comes with a standard parser | 
| 42 |  |  | and sample scenes and objects at the web site, | 
| 43 |  |  | "http://radsite.lbl.gov/mgf/HOME.html". | 
| 44 |  |  | .RE | 
| 45 |  |  | .LP | 
| 46 | greg | 1.13 | The standard parser provides both immediate and long-term | 
| 47 | greg | 1.1 | benefits, since it presents a programming interface that is more | 
| 48 |  |  | stable even than the language itself. | 
| 49 |  |  | Unlike AutoCAD DXF and other de facto standards, a change to the | 
| 50 |  |  | language will not break existing programs. | 
| 51 |  |  | This is because the parser gives the calling software only those | 
| 52 |  |  | entities it can handle. | 
| 53 |  |  | If the translator understands only polygons, it will be given only | 
| 54 |  |  | polygons. | 
| 55 |  |  | If a new geometric primitive is included in a later version of the | 
| 56 |  |  | standard, the new parser that comes with it will still be able to | 
| 57 |  |  | express this entity as polygons. | 
| 58 |  |  | Thus, the urgency of modifying code to support a changing standard | 
| 59 |  |  | is removed, and long-term stability is assured. | 
| 60 |  |  | .LP | 
| 61 |  |  | This notion of | 
| 62 |  |  | .I extensibility | 
| 63 |  |  | is a cornerstone of the format, and it goes well beyond the | 
| 64 |  |  | extensibility of other languages because is guarantees that new | 
| 65 |  |  | versions of the standard will not break existing programs, and the | 
| 66 |  |  | new information will be used as much as possible. | 
| 67 |  |  | Other languages either require that all translators stay up to date | 
| 68 |  |  | with the latest standard, or allow forward compatibility by simply | 
| 69 |  |  | .I ignoring | 
| 70 |  |  | new entities. | 
| 71 |  |  | In MGF, if NURBS are added at some point and the translator or | 
| 72 |  |  | loader does not handle them directly, the new version of the parser | 
| 73 |  |  | will automatically convert them to smoothed polygons without | 
| 74 |  |  | changing a single line of the calling program. | 
| 75 |  |  | It is merely necessary to link to the new library, and all the new | 
| 76 |  |  | entities are supported\(dg. | 
| 77 |  |  | .FS | 
| 78 |  |  | \(dgIf an old version of the parser encounters new entities it does | 
| 79 |  |  | not recognize, the default action is to ignore them, printing a warning | 
| 80 |  |  | message. | 
| 81 |  |  | This may be overridden to support custom entities, but such | 
| 82 |  |  | practice is discouraged because it weakens the standard. | 
| 83 |  |  | .FE | 
| 84 |  |  | .NH 2 | 
| 85 |  |  | What does MGF look like? | 
| 86 |  |  | .LP | 
| 87 |  |  | MGF has a simple entity-per-line structure, with a similar | 
| 88 |  |  | appearance to Wavefront's .OBJ format. | 
| 89 |  |  | Each entity is specified by a short keyword, and | 
| 90 |  |  | arguments are separated by white space (tabs and/or spaces). | 
| 91 |  |  | A newline may be escaped with a backslash ('\\'), in which case it | 
| 92 |  |  | counts as a space. | 
| 93 |  |  | Lines and continued lines may have up to 4096 characters, including | 
| 94 |  |  | newlines, tabs and spaces. | 
| 95 |  |  | A comment is an ignored entity whose keyword is the pound sign ('#'). | 
| 96 |  |  | .LP | 
| 97 |  |  | Here is an MGF file that describes a simple two-drawer file cabinet: | 
| 98 |  |  | .DS | 
| 99 |  |  | # Conversion from inches to meters | 
| 100 |  |  | xf -s .0254 | 
| 101 |  |  | # Surface material | 
| 102 |  |  | m burgundy_formica = | 
| 103 |  |  | c | 
| 104 |  |  | cxy .362 .283 | 
| 105 |  |  | rd .0402 | 
| 106 |  |  | c | 
| 107 |  |  | rs .0284 .05 | 
| 108 |  |  | sides 1 | 
| 109 |  |  | # Cabinet vertices | 
| 110 |  |  | v fc.xy = | 
| 111 |  |  | p .05 0 0 | 
| 112 |  |  | v fc.xY = | 
| 113 |  |  | p .05 18 0 | 
| 114 |  |  | v fc.XY = | 
| 115 |  |  | p 35.95 18 0 | 
| 116 |  |  | v fc.Xy = | 
| 117 |  |  | p 35.95 0 0 | 
| 118 |  |  | # Cabinet | 
| 119 |  |  | prism fc.xy fc.xY fc.XY fc.Xy 24 | 
| 120 |  |  | # Drawer vertices | 
| 121 |  |  | v fcd.Xz = | 
| 122 |  |  | p 34 0 0 | 
| 123 |  |  | v fcd.XZ = | 
| 124 |  |  | p 34 0 10 | 
| 125 |  |  | v fcd.xZ = | 
| 126 |  |  | p 0 0 10 | 
| 127 |  |  | v fcd.xz = | 
| 128 |  |  | p 0 0 0 | 
| 129 |  |  | # Two drawers | 
| 130 |  |  | o drawer | 
| 131 |  |  | xf -t 1 18.1 2 -a 2 -t 0 0 11 | 
| 132 |  |  | prism fcd.xz fcd.Xz fcd.XZ fcd.xZ .9 | 
| 133 |  |  | xf | 
| 134 |  |  | o | 
| 135 |  |  | # End of units conversion | 
| 136 |  |  | xf | 
| 137 |  |  | .DE | 
| 138 |  |  | .NH 2 | 
| 139 |  |  | MGF's place in the world of standards | 
| 140 |  |  | .LP | 
| 141 |  |  | MGF was developed initially to support detailed geometric | 
| 142 |  |  | description of light fixtures for the IESNA luminaire data standard, | 
| 143 |  |  | publication LM-63\(dg. | 
| 144 |  |  | .FS | 
| 145 |  |  | \(dgTo obtain the latest version of this standard, write to: | 
| 146 |  |  | Illuminating Engineering Society of North America, | 
| 147 |  |  | 345 East 47th St., | 
| 148 |  |  | New York, NY  10017. | 
| 149 |  |  | .FE | 
| 150 |  |  | Existing standards for geometric description were either too | 
| 151 |  |  | cumbersome (e.g. | 
| 152 |  |  | .I Radiance) | 
| 153 |  |  | or did not include physical materials (e.g. IGES). | 
| 154 |  |  | It was noted early on that a standard able to fully describe | 
| 155 |  |  | luminaires would necessarily be | 
| 156 |  |  | capable of describing other objects as well; indeed whole | 
| 157 |  |  | environments could be defined this way. | 
| 158 |  |  | Since the descriptions would be physical, they could serve as input | 
| 159 |  |  | to both lighting simulation and rendering software. | 
| 160 |  |  | A standard language for describing the appearance of physical | 
| 161 |  |  | objects has been lacking for some time, and current efforts in this | 
| 162 |  |  | direction (i.e. STEP) seem several years away from fruition. | 
| 163 |  |  | (There are other languages for describing realistic scenes | 
| 164 |  |  | that deserve mention here, such as VRML and the Manchester Scene | 
| 165 |  |  | Description Language, but none give specific attention to physical | 
| 166 |  |  | material properties and are thus unsuitable for lighting | 
| 167 |  |  | simulation.)\0 | 
| 168 |  |  | .LP | 
| 169 |  |  | In short, we saw this as an opportunity to offer the lighting and | 
| 170 |  |  | rendering community a simple and easy-to-support standard for | 
| 171 |  |  | describing environments in a physically valid way. | 
| 172 |  |  | Our hope is that this will promote sharing color, material and object | 
| 173 |  |  | libraries as well as complete scene descriptions. | 
| 174 |  |  | Sharing libraries is of obvious benefit to users and software | 
| 175 |  |  | developers alike. | 
| 176 |  |  | Sharing scenes should also permit | 
| 177 |  |  | comparisons between rendering systems and | 
| 178 |  |  | intervalidation of lighting calculations. | 
| 179 |  |  | As anyone who works in this field knows, modeling is the most | 
| 180 |  |  | difficult step in creating any simulation or rendering, and there is | 
| 181 |  |  | no excuse for this data being held prisoner by a proprietary data | 
| 182 |  |  | format. | 
| 183 |  |  | .NH | 
| 184 |  |  | MGF Basics | 
| 185 |  |  | .LP | 
| 186 |  |  | The default coordinate system in MGF is right-handed with | 
| 187 |  |  | distances given in meters, though this can be effectively changed | 
| 188 |  |  | by specifying a global transformation. | 
| 189 |  |  | The transformation context is affected by the | 
| 190 |  |  | .UL xf | 
| 191 |  |  | entity, and the whole of MGF can be understood in terms of entities | 
| 192 |  |  | and contexts. | 
| 193 |  |  | .NH 2 | 
| 194 |  |  | Entities and Contexts | 
| 195 |  |  | .LP | 
| 196 |  |  | An | 
| 197 |  |  | .I entity | 
| 198 |  |  | in MGF is any non-blank line, which must be one of a finite set of | 
| 199 |  |  | command keywords followed by zero or more arguments. | 
| 200 |  |  | (As mentioned previously, an entity may continue over multiple lines | 
| 201 |  |  | by escaping the newline with a backslash.)\0 | 
| 202 |  |  | Table 1 gives a list of entities and their expected arguments. | 
| 203 |  |  | Section 3 gives more detailed information on each entity. | 
| 204 |  |  | .KF | 
| 205 |  |  | .TS | 
| 206 |  |  | expand, box; | 
| 207 |  |  | l l l. | 
| 208 |  |  | Keyword Arguments       Interpretation | 
| 209 |  |  | =       =       = | 
| 210 |  |  | #       [anything ...]  a comment | 
| 211 |  |  | o       [name]  begin/end object context | 
| 212 |  |  | xf      [xform] begin/end transformation context | 
| 213 |  |  | i       pathname [xform]        include file (with transformation) | 
| 214 |  |  | ies     pathname [-m f][xform]  include IES luminaire (with transformation) | 
| 215 |  |  | _       _       _ | 
| 216 |  |  | c       [id [= [template]]]     get/set color context | 
| 217 |  |  | cxy     x y     set CIE (x,y) chromaticity for current color | 
| 218 |  |  | cspec   l_min l_max v1 v2 ...   set relative spectrum for current color | 
| 219 |  |  | cct     temperature     set spectrum based on black body temperature | 
| 220 |  |  | cmix    w1 c1 w2 c2 ... mix named colors to make current color | 
| 221 |  |  | _       _       _ | 
| 222 |  |  | m       [id [= [template]]]     get/set material context | 
| 223 |  |  | sides   {1|2}   set number of sides for current material | 
| 224 |  |  | rd      rho_d   set diffuse reflectance for current material | 
| 225 |  |  | td      tau_d   set diffuse transmittance for current material | 
| 226 |  |  | ed      epsilon_d       set diffuse emittance for current material | 
| 227 |  |  | rs      rho_s alpha_r   set specular reflectance for current material | 
| 228 |  |  | ts      tau_s alpha_t   set specular transmittance for current material | 
| 229 |  |  | ir      n_real n_imag   set index of refraction for current material | 
| 230 |  |  | _       _       _ | 
| 231 |  |  | v       [id [= [template]]]     get/set vertex context | 
| 232 |  |  | p       x y z   set point position for current vertex | 
| 233 |  |  | n       dx dy dz        set surface normal for current vertex | 
| 234 |  |  | _       _       _ | 
| 235 |  |  | f       v1 v2 v3 ...    polygon using current material, spec. vertices | 
| 236 | greg | 1.16 | fh      v1 v2 v3 - ...  face with explicit holes | 
| 237 | greg | 1.1 | sph     vc radius       sphere | 
| 238 |  |  | cyl     v1 radius v2    truncated right cylinder (open-ended) | 
| 239 |  |  | cone    v1 rad1 v2 rad2 truncated right cone (open-ended) | 
| 240 |  |  | prism   v1 v2 v3 ... length     truncated right prism (closed solid) | 
| 241 |  |  | ring    vc rmin rmax    circular ring with inner and outer radii | 
| 242 |  |  | torus   vc rmin rmax    circular torus with inner and outer radii | 
| 243 |  |  | .TE | 
| 244 |  |  | .QP | 
| 245 |  |  | .B "Table 1". | 
| 246 |  |  | MGF entities and their arguments. | 
| 247 |  |  | Arguments in brackets are optional. | 
| 248 |  |  | Arguments in curly braces mean one of the given choices must | 
| 249 |  |  | appear. | 
| 250 |  |  | Ellipsis (...) mean that any number of arguments may be given. | 
| 251 |  |  | .sp | 
| 252 |  |  | .KE | 
| 253 |  |  | .LP | 
| 254 |  |  | A | 
| 255 |  |  | .I context | 
| 256 |  |  | describes the current state of the interpreter, and affects or is | 
| 257 |  |  | affected by certain entities as they are read in. | 
| 258 |  |  | MGF contexts can be divided into two types, | 
| 259 |  |  | .I "hierarchical contexts" | 
| 260 |  |  | and | 
| 261 |  |  | .I "named contexts". | 
| 262 |  |  | .LP | 
| 263 |  |  | Hierarchical contexts are manipulated by a single entity and | 
| 264 |  |  | have an associated "stack" onto which new | 
| 265 |  |  | contexts are "pushed" using the entity. | 
| 266 |  |  | The last context may be "popped" by giving the entity again with no | 
| 267 |  |  | arguments. | 
| 268 |  |  | The two hierarchical contexts in MGF are the current transformation, | 
| 269 |  |  | manipulated with the | 
| 270 |  |  | .UL xf | 
| 271 |  |  | entity, and the current object, manipulated with the | 
| 272 |  |  | .UL o | 
| 273 |  |  | entity. | 
| 274 |  |  | .KF | 
| 275 |  |  | .TS | 
| 276 |  |  | expand, allbox; | 
| 277 |  |  | l c l l l. | 
| 278 |  |  | Context Cntl. Entity    Default Value   Field Entities  Affects | 
| 279 |  |  | =       =       =       =       = | 
| 280 |  |  | Object  o       -       -       - | 
| 281 |  |  | Transform       xf      -       -       T{ | 
| 282 | greg | 1.17 | f, fh, sph, cyl, cone, | 
| 283 | greg | 1.1 | ring, torus, prism | 
| 284 |  |  | T} | 
| 285 |  |  | Material        m       2-sided black   T{ | 
| 286 |  |  | sides, rd, td, | 
| 287 | greg | 1.14 | ed, rs, ts, ir | 
| 288 | greg | 1.1 | T}      T{ | 
| 289 | greg | 1.17 | f, fh, sph, cyl, cone, | 
| 290 | greg | 1.1 | ring, torus, prism | 
| 291 |  |  | T} | 
| 292 |  |  | Color   c       neutral grey    T{ | 
| 293 |  |  | cxy, cspec, cct, cmix | 
| 294 |  |  | T}      T{ | 
| 295 |  |  | rd, td, ed, rs, ts | 
| 296 |  |  | T} | 
| 297 |  |  | Vertex  v       T{ | 
| 298 |  |  | (0,0,0), | 
| 299 |  |  | no normal | 
| 300 |  |  | T}      p, n    T{ | 
| 301 | greg | 1.17 | f, fh, sph, cyl, cone, | 
| 302 | greg | 1.1 | ring, torus, prism | 
| 303 |  |  | T} | 
| 304 |  |  | .TE | 
| 305 |  |  | .QP | 
| 306 |  |  | .B "Table 2". | 
| 307 |  |  | MGF contexts and their related entities and default values. | 
| 308 |  |  | .sp | 
| 309 |  |  | .KE | 
| 310 |  |  | .LP | 
| 311 |  |  | Named contexts in contrast hold sets of values that are swapped | 
| 312 |  |  | in and out one at a time. | 
| 313 |  |  | There are three named contexts in MGF, the current material, the | 
| 314 |  |  | current color and the current vertex. | 
| 315 |  |  | Each one may be associated with an identifier (any non-white | 
| 316 |  |  | sequence of printing ASCII characters beginning with a letter), | 
| 317 |  |  | and one of each is in effect at any given time. | 
| 318 |  |  | Initially, these contexts are unnamed, and invoking an unnamed | 
| 319 |  |  | context always returns to the original (default) values. | 
| 320 |  |  | (See Table 2 for a list of contexts, their related | 
| 321 |  |  | entities and defaults.)\0 | 
| 322 |  |  | .LP | 
| 323 |  |  | It is easiest to think of a context as a "scratch space" where | 
| 324 |  |  | values are written by some entities and read by others. | 
| 325 |  |  | Naming a context allows us to reestablish the same scratch space | 
| 326 |  |  | later, usually for reference but it can be altered as well. | 
| 327 |  |  | Let us say we wanted to create a smooth blue plastic material with a | 
| 328 |  |  | diffuse reflectance of 20% and a specular reflectance of 4%: | 
| 329 |  |  | .DS | 
| 330 |  |  | # Establish a new material context called "blue_plastic" | 
| 331 |  |  | m blue_plastic = | 
| 332 |  |  | # Reestablish a previous color context called "blue" | 
| 333 |  |  | c blue | 
| 334 |  |  | # Set the diffuse reflectance, which uses the above color | 
| 335 |  |  | rd .20 | 
| 336 |  |  | # Get the unnamed color context (always starts out grey) | 
| 337 |  |  | c | 
| 338 |  |  | # Set the specular reflectance, which is uncolored | 
| 339 |  |  | rs .04 0 | 
| 340 |  |  | # We're done, the current material context is now "blue_plastic" | 
| 341 |  |  | .DE | 
| 342 |  |  | Note that the above assumes that we have previously defined a color | 
| 343 |  |  | context named "blue". | 
| 344 |  |  | If we forgot to do that, the above description would generate an | 
| 345 |  |  | "undefined" error. | 
| 346 |  |  | The color context affects the material context indirectly because it | 
| 347 |  |  | is read by the specular and diffuse reflectance entities, which are | 
| 348 |  |  | in turn written to the current material. | 
| 349 |  |  | It is not necessary to indent the entities that affect the material | 
| 350 |  |  | definition, but it improves readability. | 
| 351 |  |  | Note also that there is no explicit end to the material definition. | 
| 352 |  |  | As long as a context remains in effect, its contents may be altered | 
| 353 |  |  | by its field entities. | 
| 354 |  |  | This will not affect previous uses of the context, however. | 
| 355 |  |  | For example, a surface entity following the above definition will | 
| 356 |  |  | have the specified color and reflectance, and later changes to the | 
| 357 |  |  | material "blue_plastic" will have no effect on it. | 
| 358 |  |  | .LP | 
| 359 |  |  | Each of the three named contexts has an associated entity that | 
| 360 |  |  | controls it. | 
| 361 |  |  | The material context is controlled by the | 
| 362 |  |  | .UL m | 
| 363 |  |  | entity, the color context is controlled by the | 
| 364 |  |  | .UL c | 
| 365 |  |  | entity, and the vertex context is controlled by the | 
| 366 |  |  | .UL v | 
| 367 |  |  | entity. | 
| 368 |  |  | There are exactly four forms for each entity. | 
| 369 |  |  | The first form is the keyword by itself, which establishes | 
| 370 |  |  | an unnamed context with predetermined default values. | 
| 371 |  |  | This is a useful way to set values without worrying about saving | 
| 372 |  |  | them for recall later. | 
| 373 |  |  | The second form is to give the keyword with a previously defined | 
| 374 |  |  | name. | 
| 375 |  |  | This reestablishes a prior context for reuse. | 
| 376 |  |  | The third form is to give the keyword with a name followed by an | 
| 377 |  |  | equals sign. | 
| 378 |  |  | (There must be a space between the name and the equals sign, since | 
| 379 |  |  | it is a separate argument.)\0 | 
| 380 |  |  | This establishes a new context and assigns it the same default | 
| 381 |  |  | values as the unnamed context. | 
| 382 |  |  | The fourth and final form gives the keyword followed by a name then | 
| 383 |  |  | an equals then the name of a previous context definition. | 
| 384 |  |  | This establishes a new context for the first name, assigning the | 
| 385 |  |  | values from the second named context rather than the usual defaults. | 
| 386 |  |  | This is a convenient way create an alias or | 
| 387 |  |  | to modify a context under a new name (i.e. "save as"). | 
| 388 |  |  | .NH 2 | 
| 389 |  |  | Hierarchical Contexts and Transformations | 
| 390 |  |  | .LP | 
| 391 |  |  | As mentioned in the last subsection, there are two hierarchical | 
| 392 |  |  | contexts in MGF, the current object and the current transformation. | 
| 393 |  |  | We will start by discussing the current object, since it is | 
| 394 |  |  | the simpler of the two. | 
| 395 |  |  | .NH 3 | 
| 396 |  |  | Objects | 
| 397 |  |  | .LP | 
| 398 |  |  | There is no particular need in lighting simulation or rendering to | 
| 399 |  |  | name objects, but it may help the user | 
| 400 |  |  | to know what object a particular surface is associated with. | 
| 401 |  |  | The | 
| 402 |  |  | .UL o | 
| 403 |  |  | entity provides a convenient mechanism for associating names with | 
| 404 |  |  | surfaces. | 
| 405 |  |  | The basic use of this entity is as follows: | 
| 406 |  |  | .DS | 
| 407 |  |  | o object_name | 
| 408 |  |  | [object entities...] | 
| 409 |  |  | o subobject_name | 
| 410 |  |  | [subobject entities...] | 
| 411 |  |  | o | 
| 412 |  |  | [more object entities and subobjects...] | 
| 413 |  |  | o | 
| 414 |  |  | .DE | 
| 415 |  |  | The | 
| 416 |  |  | .UL o | 
| 417 |  |  | keyword by itself marks the end of an object context. | 
| 418 |  |  | Any number of hierarchical context levels are supported, and there are no | 
| 419 |  |  | rules governing the choice of object names except that they begin | 
| 420 |  |  | with a letter and be made up of printing, non-white ASCII characters. | 
| 421 |  |  | Indentation is not necessary of course, but it does improve | 
| 422 |  |  | readability. | 
| 423 |  |  | .NH 3 | 
| 424 |  |  | Transformations | 
| 425 |  |  | .LP | 
| 426 |  |  | MGF supports only rigid-body (i.e. non-distorting) transformations | 
| 427 |  |  | with uniform scaling. | 
| 428 |  |  | Unlike the other contexts, transformations have no associated | 
| 429 |  |  | name, only arguments. | 
| 430 |  |  | Thus, there is no way to reestablish a previous transformation other | 
| 431 |  |  | than to give the same arguments over again. | 
| 432 |  |  | Since the arguments are concise and self-explanatory, this was thought | 
| 433 |  |  | sufficient. | 
| 434 |  |  | The following transformation flags and | 
| 435 |  |  | parameters are defined: | 
| 436 | greg | 1.2 | .TS | 
| 437 |  |  | center; | 
| 438 | greg | 1.1 | l l. | 
| 439 |  |  | -t dx dy dz     translate objects along the given vector | 
| 440 |  |  | -rx degrees     rotate objects about the X-axis | 
| 441 |  |  | -ry degrees     rotate objects about the Y-axis | 
| 442 |  |  | -rz degrees     rotate objects about the Z-axis | 
| 443 |  |  | -s scalefactor  scale objects by the given factor | 
| 444 |  |  | -mx     mirror objects about the Y-Z plane | 
| 445 |  |  | -my     mirror objects about the X-Z plane | 
| 446 |  |  | -mz     mirror objects about the X-Y plane | 
| 447 |  |  | -i N    repeat the following arguments N times | 
| 448 |  |  | -a N    make an array of N geometric instances | 
| 449 |  |  | .TE | 
| 450 |  |  | Transform arguments have a cumulative effect. | 
| 451 |  |  | That is, a rotation | 
| 452 |  |  | about X of 20 degrees followed by a rotation about X of -50 degrees | 
| 453 |  |  | results in a total rotation of -30 degrees. | 
| 454 |  |  | However, if the two | 
| 455 |  |  | rotations are separated by some translation vector, the cumulative | 
| 456 |  |  | effect is quite different. | 
| 457 |  |  | It is best to think of each argument as | 
| 458 |  |  | acting on the included geometric objects, and each subsequent transformation | 
| 459 |  |  | argument affects the objects relative to their new position/orientation. | 
| 460 |  |  | .LP | 
| 461 |  |  | For example, rotating an object about its center is most easily done | 
| 462 |  |  | by translating | 
| 463 |  |  | the object back to the origin, applying the desired rotation, and translating | 
| 464 |  |  | it again back to its original position, like so: | 
| 465 |  |  | .DS | 
| 466 |  |  | # rotate an included object 20 degrees clockwise looking down | 
| 467 |  |  | # an axis parallel to Y and passing through the point (15,0,-35) | 
| 468 |  |  | xf -t -15 0 35 -ry -20 -t 15 0 -35 | 
| 469 |  |  | i object.mgf | 
| 470 |  |  | xf | 
| 471 |  |  | .DE | 
| 472 |  |  | Note that the include entity, | 
| 473 |  |  | .UL i, | 
| 474 |  |  | permits a transformation to be given with it, so the above could | 
| 475 |  |  | have been written more compactly as: | 
| 476 |  |  | .DS | 
| 477 |  |  | i object.mgf -t -15 0 35 -ry -20 -t 15 0 -35 | 
| 478 |  |  | .DE | 
| 479 |  |  | .LP | 
| 480 |  |  | Rotations are given in degrees counter-clockwise about a principal axis. | 
| 481 |  |  | That is, with the thumb of the right hand pointing in the direction | 
| 482 |  |  | of the axis, rotation follows the curl of the fingers. | 
| 483 |  |  | .LP | 
| 484 |  |  | The transform entity itself is cumulative, but in the reverse | 
| 485 |  |  | order to its arguments. | 
| 486 |  |  | That is, later transformations (i.e. enclosed transformations) | 
| 487 |  |  | are prepended to existing (i.e. enclosing) ones. | 
| 488 |  |  | A transform command | 
| 489 |  |  | with no arguments is used to return to the previous condition. | 
| 490 |  |  | It is | 
| 491 |  |  | necessary that transforms and their end statements ("xf" by itself) be | 
| 492 |  |  | balanced in a file, so that later or enclosing files are not affected. | 
| 493 |  |  | .LP | 
| 494 |  |  | Transformations apply only to geometric types, e.g. polygons, spheres, etc. | 
| 495 |  |  | Vertices and the components that go into geometry are not directly affected. | 
| 496 |  |  | This is to avoid confusion and the inadvertent multiple application of a | 
| 497 |  |  | given transformation. | 
| 498 |  |  | For example: | 
| 499 |  |  | .DS | 
| 500 |  |  | xf -t 5 0 0 | 
| 501 |  |  | v v1 = | 
| 502 |  |  | p 0 10 0 | 
| 503 |  |  | n 0 0 1 | 
| 504 |  |  | xf -rx 180 | 
| 505 |  |  | # Transform now in effect is "-rx 180 -t 5 0 0" | 
| 506 |  |  | ring v1 0 2 | 
| 507 |  |  | xf | 
| 508 |  |  | xf | 
| 509 |  |  | .DE | 
| 510 |  |  | The final ring center is (5,-10,0) -- note that the vertex itself is | 
| 511 |  |  | not affected by the transformation, only the geometry that calls on | 
| 512 |  |  | it. | 
| 513 |  |  | The normal orientation is (0,0,-1) due to the rotation about X, | 
| 514 |  |  | which also reversed the sign of the central Y coordinate. | 
| 515 |  |  | .NH 3 | 
| 516 |  |  | Arrays | 
| 517 |  |  | .LP | 
| 518 |  |  | The -a N transform specification causes the following transform | 
| 519 |  |  | arguments to be repeated along with the contents of the included | 
| 520 |  |  | objects N times. | 
| 521 |  |  | The first instance of the geometry will be in its | 
| 522 |  |  | initial location; the second instance will be repositioned according | 
| 523 |  |  | to the named transformation; the third instance will be repositioned by | 
| 524 |  |  | applying this transformation twice, and so on up to N-1 applications. | 
| 525 |  |  | .LP | 
| 526 |  |  | Multi-dimensional arrays may be specified with a single include | 
| 527 |  |  | entity by giving multiple array commands separated by their | 
| 528 |  |  | corresponding transforms. | 
| 529 |  |  | A final transformation may be given | 
| 530 |  |  | by preceding it with a -i 1 specification. | 
| 531 |  |  | In other words, the | 
| 532 |  |  | scope of an array command continues until the next -i or -a option. | 
| 533 |  |  | .LP | 
| 534 |  |  | The following MGF description places 60 spheres at a one unit spacing | 
| 535 |  |  | in a 3x4x5 array, then moves the whole thing to an origin of | 
| 536 |  |  | (15,30,45): | 
| 537 |  |  | .DS | 
| 538 |  |  | v v0 = | 
| 539 |  |  | p 0 0 0 | 
| 540 |  |  | xf -a 3 -t 1 0 0 -a 4 -t 0 1 0 -a 5 -t 0 0 1 -i 1 -t 15 30 45 | 
| 541 |  |  | sph v0 0.1 | 
| 542 |  |  | xf | 
| 543 |  |  | .DE | 
| 544 |  |  | Note the "-i 1" in the specification, which marks the end of the | 
| 545 |  |  | third array arguments before the final translation. | 
| 546 |  |  | .NH 2 | 
| 547 |  |  | Detailed MGF Example | 
| 548 |  |  | .LP | 
| 549 |  |  | The following example of a simple room with a single door | 
| 550 |  |  | and six file cabinets shows MGF in action, with copious comments to | 
| 551 |  |  | help explain what's going on. | 
| 552 | greg | 1.2 | .LP | 
| 553 | greg | 1.1 | .DS | 
| 554 |  |  | # "ceiling_tile" is a diffuse white surface with 75% reflectance: | 
| 555 |  |  | # Create new named material context and clear it | 
| 556 |  |  | m ceiling_tile = | 
| 557 |  |  | # Specify one-sided material so we can see through from above | 
| 558 |  |  | sides 1 | 
| 559 |  |  | # Set neutral color | 
| 560 |  |  | c | 
| 561 |  |  | # Set diffuse reflectance | 
| 562 |  |  | rd .75 | 
| 563 |  |  | # "stainless_steel" is a mostly specular surface with 70% reflectance: | 
| 564 |  |  | m stainless_steel = | 
| 565 |  |  | sides 1 | 
| 566 |  |  | c | 
| 567 |  |  | # Set specular reflectance to 50%, .08 roughness | 
| 568 |  |  | rs .5 .08 | 
| 569 |  |  | # Other 20% reflectance is diffuse | 
| 570 |  |  | rd .2 | 
| 571 |  |  |  | 
| 572 |  |  | # The following materials were measured with a spectrophotometer: | 
| 573 |  |  | m beige_paint = | 
| 574 |  |  | sides 1 | 
| 575 |  |  | # Set diffuse spectral reflectance | 
| 576 |  |  | c | 
| 577 |  |  | # Spectrum measured in 10 nm increments from 400 to 700 nm | 
| 578 |  |  | cspec 400 700 35.29 44.87 47.25 47.03 46.87 47.00 47.09 \\\\ | 
| 579 |  |  | 47.15 46.80 46.17 46.26 48.74 51.08 51.31 51.10 \\\\ | 
| 580 |  |  | 51.11 50.52 50.36 51.72 53.61 53.95 52.08 49.49 \\\\ | 
| 581 |  |  | 48.30 48.75 49.99 51.35 52.75 54.44 56.34 58.00 | 
| 582 |  |  | rd 0.5078 | 
| 583 |  |  | # Neutral (grey) specular component | 
| 584 |  |  | c | 
| 585 |  |  | rs 0.0099 0.08000 | 
| 586 |  |  | m mottled_carpet = | 
| 587 |  |  | sides 1 | 
| 588 |  |  | c | 
| 589 |  |  | cspec 400 700 11.23 11.28 11.39 11.49 11.61 11.73 11.88 \\\\ | 
| 590 |  |  | 12.02 12.12 12.19 12.30 12.37 12.37 12.36 12.34 \\\\ | 
| 591 |  |  | 12.28 12.22 12.29 12.45 12.59 12.70 12.77 12.82 \\\\ | 
| 592 |  |  | 12.88 12.98 13.24 13.67 14.31 15.55 17.46 19.75 | 
| 593 |  |  | rd 0.1245 | 
| 594 |  |  | m reddish_cloth = | 
| 595 |  |  | # 2-sided so we can observe it from behind | 
| 596 |  |  | sides 2 | 
| 597 |  |  | c | 
| 598 |  |  | cspec 400 700 28.62 27.96 27.86 28.28 29.28 30.49 31.61 \\\\ | 
| 599 |  |  | 32.27 32.26 31.83 31.13 30.07 29.14 29.03 29.69 \\\\ | 
| 600 |  |  | 30.79 32.30 33.90 34.56 34.32 33.85 33.51 33.30 \\\\ | 
| 601 |  |  | 33.43 34.06 35.26 37.04 39.41 42.55 46.46 51.00 | 
| 602 |  |  | rd 0.3210 | 
| 603 |  |  | m burgundy_formica = | 
| 604 |  |  | sides 1 | 
| 605 |  |  | c | 
| 606 |  |  | cspec 400 700  3.86  3.74  3.63  3.51  3.34  3.21  3.14 \\\\ | 
| 607 |  |  | 3.09  3.08  3.14  3.13  2.91  2.72  2.74  2.72 \\\\ | 
| 608 |  |  | 2.60  2.68  3.40  4.76  6.05  6.65  6.75  6.68 \\\\ | 
| 609 |  |  | 6.63  6.56  6.51  6.46  6.41  6.36  6.34  6.34 | 
| 610 |  |  | rd 0.0402 | 
| 611 |  |  | c | 
| 612 |  |  | rs 0.0284 0.05000 | 
| 613 |  |  | m speckled_grey_formica = | 
| 614 |  |  | sides 1 | 
| 615 |  |  | c | 
| 616 |  |  | cspec 400 700 30.95 44.77 51.15 52.60 53.00 53.37 53.68 \\\\ | 
| 617 |  |  | 54.07 54.33 54.57 54.85 55.20 55.42 55.51 55.54 \\\\ | 
| 618 |  |  | 55.46 55.33 55.30 55.52 55.81 55.91 55.92 56.00 \\\\ | 
| 619 |  |  | 56.22 56.45 56.66 56.72 56.58 56.44 56.39 56.39 | 
| 620 |  |  | rd 0.5550 | 
| 621 |  |  | c | 
| 622 |  |  | rs 0.0149 0.15000 | 
| 623 |  |  |  | 
| 624 |  |  | # 40' x 22' x 9' office space with no windows and one door | 
| 625 |  |  |  | 
| 626 |  |  | # All measurements are in inches, so enclose with a metric conversion: | 
| 627 |  |  | xf -s .0254 | 
| 628 |  |  |  | 
| 629 |  |  | # The room corner vertices: | 
| 630 |  |  | v rc.xyz = | 
| 631 |  |  | p 0 0 0 | 
| 632 |  |  | v rc.Xyz = | 
| 633 |  |  | p 480 0 0 | 
| 634 |  |  | v rc.xYz = | 
| 635 |  |  | p 0 264 0 | 
| 636 |  |  | v rc.xyZ = | 
| 637 |  |  | p 0 0 108 | 
| 638 |  |  | v rc.XYz = | 
| 639 |  |  | p 480 264 0 | 
| 640 |  |  | v rc.xYZ = | 
| 641 |  |  | p 0 264 108 | 
| 642 |  |  | v rc.XyZ = | 
| 643 |  |  | p 480 0 108 | 
| 644 |  |  | v rc.XYZ = | 
| 645 |  |  | p 480 264 108 | 
| 646 |  |  |  | 
| 647 |  |  | # The floor: | 
| 648 |  |  | # Push object name | 
| 649 |  |  | o floor | 
| 650 |  |  | # Get previously defined carpet material | 
| 651 |  |  | m mottled_carpet | 
| 652 |  |  | # Polygonal face using defined vertices | 
| 653 |  |  | f rc.xyz rc.Xyz rc.XYz rc.xYz | 
| 654 |  |  | # Pop object name | 
| 655 |  |  | o | 
| 656 |  |  |  | 
| 657 |  |  | # The ceiling: | 
| 658 |  |  | o ceiling | 
| 659 |  |  | m ceiling_tile | 
| 660 |  |  | f rc.xyZ rc.xYZ rc.XYZ rc.XyZ | 
| 661 |  |  | o | 
| 662 |  |  |  | 
| 663 |  |  | # The door outline vertices: | 
| 664 |  |  | v do.xz = | 
| 665 |  |  | p 216 0 0 | 
| 666 |  |  | v do.Xz = | 
| 667 |  |  | p 264 0 0 | 
| 668 |  |  | v do.xZ = | 
| 669 |  |  | p 216 0 84 | 
| 670 |  |  | v do.XZ = | 
| 671 |  |  | p 264 0 84 | 
| 672 |  |  |  | 
| 673 |  |  | # The walls: | 
| 674 |  |  | o wall | 
| 675 |  |  | m beige_paint | 
| 676 |  |  | o x | 
| 677 |  |  | f rc.xyz rc.xYz rc.xYZ rc.xyZ | 
| 678 |  |  | o | 
| 679 |  |  | o X | 
| 680 |  |  | f rc.Xyz rc.XyZ rc.XYZ rc.XYz | 
| 681 |  |  | o | 
| 682 |  |  | o y | 
| 683 |  |  | f rc.xyz rc.xyZ rc.XyZ rc.Xyz do.Xz do.XZ do.xZ do.xz | 
| 684 |  |  | o | 
| 685 |  |  | o Y | 
| 686 |  |  | f rc.xYz rc.XYz rc.XYZ rc.xYZ | 
| 687 |  |  | o | 
| 688 |  |  | o | 
| 689 |  |  |  | 
| 690 |  |  | # The door and jam vertices: | 
| 691 |  |  | v djo.xz = | 
| 692 |  |  | p 216 .5 0 | 
| 693 |  |  | v djo.xZ = | 
| 694 |  |  | p 216 .5 84 | 
| 695 |  |  | v djo.XZ = | 
| 696 |  |  | p 264 .5 84 | 
| 697 |  |  | v djo.Xz = | 
| 698 |  |  | p 264 .5 0 | 
| 699 |  |  | v dji.Xz = | 
| 700 |  |  | p 262 .5 0 | 
| 701 |  |  | v dji.XZ = | 
| 702 |  |  | p 262 .5 82 | 
| 703 |  |  | v dji.xZ = | 
| 704 |  |  | p 218 .5 82 | 
| 705 |  |  | v dji.xz = | 
| 706 |  |  | p 218 .5 0 | 
| 707 |  |  | v door.xz = | 
| 708 |  |  | p 218 0 0 | 
| 709 |  |  | v door.xZ = | 
| 710 |  |  | p 218 0 82 | 
| 711 |  |  | v door.XZ = | 
| 712 |  |  | p 262 0 82 | 
| 713 |  |  | v door.Xz = | 
| 714 |  |  | p 262 0 0 | 
| 715 |  |  |  | 
| 716 |  |  | # The door, jam and knob | 
| 717 |  |  | o door | 
| 718 |  |  | m burgundy_formica | 
| 719 |  |  | f door.xz door.xZ door.XZ door.Xz | 
| 720 |  |  | o jam | 
| 721 |  |  | m beige_paint | 
| 722 |  |  | f djo.xz djo.xZ djo.XZ djo.Xz dji.Xz dji.XZ dji.xZ dji.xz | 
| 723 |  |  | f djo.xz do.xz do.xZ djo.xZ | 
| 724 |  |  | f djo.xZ do.xZ do.XZ djo.XZ | 
| 725 |  |  | f djo.Xz djo.XZ do.XZ do.Xz | 
| 726 |  |  | f dji.xz dji.xZ door.xZ door.xz | 
| 727 |  |  | f dji.xZ dji.XZ door.XZ door.xZ | 
| 728 |  |  | f dji.Xz door.Xz door.XZ dji.XZ | 
| 729 |  |  | o | 
| 730 |  |  | o knob | 
| 731 |  |  | m stainless_steel | 
| 732 |  |  | # Define vertices needed for curved geometry | 
| 733 |  |  | v kb1 = | 
| 734 |  |  | p 257 0 36 | 
| 735 |  |  | v kb2 = | 
| 736 |  |  | p 257 .25 36 | 
| 737 |  |  | n 0 1 0 | 
| 738 |  |  | v kb3 = | 
| 739 |  |  | p 257 2 36 | 
| 740 |  |  | # 1" diameter cylindrical base from kb1 to kb2 | 
| 741 |  |  | cyl kb1 1 kb2 | 
| 742 |  |  | # Ring at base of knob stem | 
| 743 |  |  | ring kb2 .4 1 | 
| 744 |  |  | # Knob stem | 
| 745 |  |  | cyl kb2 .4 kb3 | 
| 746 |  |  | # Spherical knob | 
| 747 |  |  | sph kb3 .85 | 
| 748 |  |  | o | 
| 749 |  |  | o | 
| 750 |  |  |  | 
| 751 |  |  | # Six file cabinets (36" wide each) | 
| 752 |  |  | # ("filecab.inc" was given as an earlier example in Section 1.2) | 
| 753 |  |  | o filecab.x | 
| 754 |  |  | # include a file as an array of three 36" apart | 
| 755 |  |  | i filecab.inc -t -36 0 0 -rz -90 -t 1 54 0 -a 3 -t 0 36 0 | 
| 756 |  |  | o | 
| 757 |  |  | o filecab.X | 
| 758 |  |  | # the other three cabinets | 
| 759 |  |  | i filecab.inc -rz 90 -t 479 54 0 -a 3 -t 0 36 0 | 
| 760 |  |  | o | 
| 761 |  |  |  | 
| 762 |  |  | # End of transform from inches to meters: | 
| 763 |  |  | xf | 
| 764 |  |  |  | 
| 765 |  |  | # The 10 recessed fluorescent ceiling fixtures | 
| 766 |  |  | ies hlrs2gna.ies -t 1.2192 2.1336 2.74 -a 5 -t 2.4384 0 0 -a 2 -t 0 2.4384 0 | 
| 767 |  |  | .DE | 
| 768 |  |  | .bp | 
| 769 |  |  | .NH | 
| 770 |  |  | MGF Entity Reference | 
| 771 |  |  | .LP | 
| 772 |  |  | There are currently 28 entities in the MGF specification. | 
| 773 |  |  | For ease of reference we have broken these into five categories: | 
| 774 |  |  | .IP 1. | 
| 775 |  |  | General | 
| 776 | greg | 1.2 | .TS | 
| 777 | greg | 1.1 | lw(.75i) lw(1.75i) lw(3i). | 
| 778 |  |  | #       [anything ...]  a comment | 
| 779 |  |  | o       [name]  begin/end object context | 
| 780 |  |  | xf      [xform] begin/end transformation context | 
| 781 |  |  | i       pathname [xform]        include file (with transformation) | 
| 782 |  |  | ies     pathname [-m f][xform]  include IES luminaire (with transformation) | 
| 783 |  |  | .TE | 
| 784 |  |  | .IP 2. | 
| 785 |  |  | Color | 
| 786 | greg | 1.2 | .TS | 
| 787 | greg | 1.1 | lw(.75i) lw(1.75i) lw(3i). | 
| 788 |  |  | c       [id [= [template]]]     get/set color context | 
| 789 |  |  | cxy     x y     set CIE (x,y) chromaticity for current color | 
| 790 |  |  | cspec   l_min l_max v1 v2 ...   set relative spectrum for current color | 
| 791 |  |  | cct     temperature     set spectrum based on black body temperature | 
| 792 |  |  | cmix    w1 c1 w2 c2 ... mix named colors to make current color | 
| 793 |  |  | .TE | 
| 794 |  |  | .IP 3. | 
| 795 |  |  | Material | 
| 796 |  |  | .TS | 
| 797 |  |  | lw(.75i) lw(1.75i) lw(3i). | 
| 798 |  |  | m       [id [= [template]]]     get/set material context | 
| 799 |  |  | sides   {1|2}   set number of sides for current material | 
| 800 |  |  | rd      rho_d   set diffuse reflectance for current material | 
| 801 |  |  | td      tau_d   set diffuse transmittance for current material | 
| 802 |  |  | ed      epsilon_d       set diffuse emittance for current material | 
| 803 |  |  | rs      rho_s alpha_r   set specular reflectance for current material | 
| 804 |  |  | ts      tau_s alpha_t   set specular transmittance for current material | 
| 805 |  |  | ir      n_real n_imag   set index of refraction for current material | 
| 806 |  |  | .TE | 
| 807 |  |  | .IP 4. | 
| 808 |  |  | Vertex | 
| 809 |  |  | .TS | 
| 810 |  |  | lw(.75i) lw(1.75i) lw(3i). | 
| 811 |  |  | v       [id [= [template]]]     get/set vertex context | 
| 812 |  |  | p       x y z   set point position for current vertex | 
| 813 |  |  | n       dx dy dz        set surface normal for current vertex | 
| 814 |  |  | .TE | 
| 815 |  |  | .IP 5. | 
| 816 |  |  | Geometry | 
| 817 |  |  | .TS | 
| 818 |  |  | lw(.75i) lw(1.75i) lw(3i). | 
| 819 |  |  | f       v1 v2 v3 ...    polygon using current material, spec. vertices | 
| 820 | greg | 1.17 | fh      v1 v2 v3 - ...  face with explicit holes | 
| 821 | greg | 1.1 | sph     vc radius       sphere | 
| 822 |  |  | cyl     v1 radius v2    truncated right cylinder (open-ended) | 
| 823 |  |  | cone    v1 rad1 v2 rad2 truncated right cone (open-ended) | 
| 824 |  |  | prism   v1 v2 v3 ... length     truncated right prism (closed solid) | 
| 825 |  |  | ring    vc rmin rmax    circular ring with inner and outer radii | 
| 826 |  |  | torus   vc rmin rmax    circular torus with inner and outer radii | 
| 827 |  |  | .TE | 
| 828 |  |  | .ds LH General Entities | 
| 829 |  |  | .ds RH # | 
| 830 |  |  | .bp | 
| 831 |  |  | .SH | 
| 832 |  |  | NAME | 
| 833 |  |  | .LP | 
| 834 |  |  | # - a comment | 
| 835 |  |  | .SH | 
| 836 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 837 |  |  | .LP | 
| 838 |  |  | .B # | 
| 839 |  |  | [ | 
| 840 |  |  | .I anything | 
| 841 |  |  | ] | 
| 842 |  |  | .SH | 
| 843 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 844 |  |  | .LP | 
| 845 |  |  | A comment is a bit of text explanation. | 
| 846 |  |  | Since it is an entity like any other (except that it has no effect), | 
| 847 |  |  | there must be at least one space between the keyword (which is a | 
| 848 |  |  | pound sign) and the "arguments," and the end of line may be escaped | 
| 849 |  |  | as usual with the backslash character ('\\'). | 
| 850 |  |  | .LP | 
| 851 |  |  | A comment may actually be used to hold auxiliary information such as | 
| 852 |  |  | view parameters, which may be interpreted by some destination program. | 
| 853 |  |  | Care should be taken under such circumstances that the user does not | 
| 854 |  |  | inadvertently mung or mimic this information in other comments, and | 
| 855 |  |  | it is therefore advisable to use an additional set of identifying | 
| 856 |  |  | characters to distinguish such data. | 
| 857 |  |  | .SH | 
| 858 |  |  | EXAMPLE | 
| 859 |  |  | .DS | 
| 860 |  |  | # The following include file is in inches, so convert to meters | 
| 861 |  |  | i cubgeom.inc -s .0254 | 
| 862 |  |  | # Stuff we don't want to see at the moment: | 
| 863 |  |  | # i person.mgf -t 3 2 0 | 
| 864 |  |  | # ies hlrs3gna.ies -rz 90 -t 1.524 1.8288 2.74 \\\\ | 
| 865 |  |  | -a 6 -t 1.8288 0 0 -a 2 -t 0 3.048 0 | 
| 866 |  |  | .DE | 
| 867 |  |  | .ds RH O | 
| 868 |  |  | .bp | 
| 869 |  |  | .SH | 
| 870 |  |  | NAME | 
| 871 |  |  | .LP | 
| 872 |  |  | o - begin or end object context | 
| 873 |  |  | .SH | 
| 874 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 875 |  |  | .LP | 
| 876 |  |  | .B o | 
| 877 |  |  | [ | 
| 878 |  |  | .I name | 
| 879 |  |  | ] | 
| 880 |  |  | .SH | 
| 881 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 882 |  |  | .LP | 
| 883 |  |  | If | 
| 884 |  |  | .I name | 
| 885 |  |  | is given, we push a new object context onto the stack, which is to | 
| 886 |  |  | say that we begin a new subobject by this name\(dg. | 
| 887 |  |  | .FS | 
| 888 |  |  | \(dgA name is any sequence of printing, non-white ASCII characters | 
| 889 |  |  | beginning with a letter. | 
| 890 |  |  | .FE | 
| 891 |  |  | If the | 
| 892 |  |  | .UL o | 
| 893 |  |  | keyword is given by itself, then we pop the last object context off | 
| 894 |  |  | the stack, which means that we leave the current subobject. | 
| 895 |  |  | .LP | 
| 896 |  |  | All geometry between the start of an object context and its matching | 
| 897 |  |  | end statement is associated with the given name. | 
| 898 |  |  | This may be used in modeling software to help identify objects and | 
| 899 |  |  | subobjects, or it may be ignored altogether. | 
| 900 |  |  | .LP | 
| 901 |  |  | Object begin and end statements should be balanced in a file, and | 
| 902 |  |  | care should be taken not to overlap transform | 
| 903 |  |  | .UL (xf) | 
| 904 |  |  | contexts with object contexts, especially when arrays are involved. | 
| 905 |  |  | This is because the standard parser will assign object contexts to | 
| 906 |  |  | instanced geometry, which can get confused with other object | 
| 907 |  |  | contexts if a clear enclosure is not maintained. | 
| 908 |  |  | .SH | 
| 909 |  |  | EXAMPLE | 
| 910 |  |  | .DS | 
| 911 |  |  | o body | 
| 912 |  |  | o torso | 
| 913 |  |  | i torso.mgf | 
| 914 |  |  | o | 
| 915 |  |  | o arm | 
| 916 |  |  | o left | 
| 917 |  |  | i leftarm.mgf | 
| 918 |  |  | o | 
| 919 |  |  | o right | 
| 920 |  |  | i leftarm.mgf -mx | 
| 921 |  |  | o | 
| 922 |  |  | o | 
| 923 |  |  | o | 
| 924 |  |  | .DE | 
| 925 |  |  | .SH | 
| 926 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 927 |  |  | .LP | 
| 928 |  |  | .UL xf | 
| 929 |  |  | .ds RH XF | 
| 930 |  |  | .bp | 
| 931 |  |  | .SH | 
| 932 |  |  | NAME | 
| 933 |  |  | .LP | 
| 934 |  |  | xf - begin or end transformation context | 
| 935 |  |  | .SH | 
| 936 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 937 |  |  | .LP | 
| 938 |  |  | .B xf | 
| 939 |  |  | [ | 
| 940 |  |  | .I transform | 
| 941 |  |  | ] | 
| 942 |  |  | .SH | 
| 943 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 944 |  |  | .LP | 
| 945 |  |  | If a set of | 
| 946 |  |  | .I transform | 
| 947 |  |  | arguments are given, we push a new transformation context onto the | 
| 948 |  |  | stack. | 
| 949 |  |  | If the | 
| 950 |  |  | .UL xf | 
| 951 |  |  | keyword is given by itself, then we pop the last transformation | 
| 952 |  |  | context off the stack. | 
| 953 |  |  | The total transformation in effect at any given time is | 
| 954 |  |  | computed by prepending each set subcontext arguments onto those of | 
| 955 |  |  | its enclosing context. | 
| 956 |  |  | This and other details about transformation specifications | 
| 957 |  |  | are explained in some detail in section 2.2.2. | 
| 958 |  |  | .LP | 
| 959 |  |  | The following transformation flags and | 
| 960 |  |  | parameters are defined: | 
| 961 |  |  | .TS | 
| 962 |  |  | center; | 
| 963 |  |  | l l. | 
| 964 |  |  | -t dx dy dz     translate objects along the given vector | 
| 965 |  |  | -rx degrees     rotate objects about the X-axis | 
| 966 |  |  | -ry degrees     rotate objects about the Y-axis | 
| 967 |  |  | -rz degrees     rotate objects about the Z-axis | 
| 968 |  |  | -s scalefactor  scale objects by the given factor | 
| 969 |  |  | -mx     mirror objects about the Y-Z plane | 
| 970 |  |  | -my     mirror objects about the X-Z plane | 
| 971 |  |  | -mz     mirror objects about the X-Y plane | 
| 972 |  |  | -i N    repeat the following arguments N times | 
| 973 |  |  | -a N    make an array of N geometric instances | 
| 974 |  |  | .TE | 
| 975 |  |  | .SH | 
| 976 |  |  | EXAMPLE | 
| 977 |  |  | .DS | 
| 978 |  |  | # Create 3x5 array of evenly-spaced spheres (grid size = 3) | 
| 979 |  |  | v vc = | 
| 980 |  |  | p 0 0 0 | 
| 981 |  |  | xf -t 1 1 10 -a 3 -t 3 0 0 -a 5 -t 0 3 0 | 
| 982 |  |  | sph vc .5 | 
| 983 |  |  | xf | 
| 984 |  |  | .DE | 
| 985 |  |  | .SH | 
| 986 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 987 |  |  | .LP | 
| 988 |  |  | .UL i, | 
| 989 |  |  | .UL ies, | 
| 990 |  |  | .UL o | 
| 991 |  |  | .ds RH I | 
| 992 |  |  | .bp | 
| 993 |  |  | .SH | 
| 994 |  |  | NAME | 
| 995 |  |  | .LP | 
| 996 |  |  | i - include MGF data file | 
| 997 |  |  | .SH | 
| 998 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 999 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1000 |  |  | .B i | 
| 1001 |  |  | .I pathname | 
| 1002 |  |  | [ | 
| 1003 |  |  | .I transform | 
| 1004 |  |  | ] | 
| 1005 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1006 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 1007 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1008 |  |  | Include the information contained in the file | 
| 1009 |  |  | .I pathname. | 
| 1010 |  |  | If a | 
| 1011 |  |  | .I transform | 
| 1012 |  |  | specification is given, then it will be applied as though the | 
| 1013 |  |  | include statement were enclosed by beginning and ending | 
| 1014 |  |  | .UL xf | 
| 1015 |  |  | entities with this transformation. | 
| 1016 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1017 |  |  | The | 
| 1018 |  |  | .I pathname | 
| 1019 |  |  | will be interpreted relative to the enclosing MGF file. | 
| 1020 |  |  | That is, if the file containing the include statement is in some | 
| 1021 |  |  | parent or subdirectory, then the given pathname is appended to this | 
| 1022 |  |  | directory. | 
| 1023 |  |  | It is illegal to specify a | 
| 1024 |  |  | .I pathname | 
| 1025 |  |  | relative to the root directory, and the MGF standard requires that | 
| 1026 |  |  | all filenames adhere to the ISO-9660 8.3 name format for maximum | 
| 1027 |  |  | portability between systems. | 
| 1028 |  |  | The directory separator is defined to be slash ('/'), and drive | 
| 1029 |  |  | specifications (such as "c:") are not allowed. | 
| 1030 |  |  | All pathnames should be given in lower case, and will be converted to | 
| 1031 |  |  | upper case on systems that require it. | 
| 1032 |  |  | (That way, there are no accidental name collisions.)\0 | 
| 1033 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1034 |  |  | The suggested suffix for MGF-adherent files is ".mgf". | 
| 1035 |  |  | Files that are not in metric units but are in MGF may be given any | 
| 1036 |  |  | suffix, but we suggest using ".inc" as a convention. | 
| 1037 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1038 |  |  | EXAMPLE | 
| 1039 |  |  | .DS | 
| 1040 |  |  | # Define vertices for 62x30" partition | 
| 1041 |  |  | i pv62x30.inc | 
| 1042 |  |  | # Insert 2 62x30" partitions | 
| 1043 |  |  | o cpart1 | 
| 1044 |  |  | i partn.inc -t 75 130.5 0 | 
| 1045 |  |  | o | 
| 1046 |  |  | o cpart3 | 
| 1047 |  |  | i partn.inc -t 186 130.5 0 | 
| 1048 |  |  | o | 
| 1049 |  |  | # Define vertices for 62x36" partition | 
| 1050 |  |  | i pv62x36.inc | 
| 1051 |  |  | # Insert 62x36" partition | 
| 1052 |  |  | o cpart2 | 
| 1053 |  |  | i partn.inc -t 105 130.5 0 | 
| 1054 |  |  | o | 
| 1055 |  |  | .DE | 
| 1056 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1057 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 1058 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1059 |  |  | .UL ies, | 
| 1060 |  |  | .UL o, | 
| 1061 |  |  | .UL xf | 
| 1062 |  |  | .ds RH IES | 
| 1063 |  |  | .bp | 
| 1064 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1065 |  |  | NAME | 
| 1066 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1067 |  |  | ies - include IESNA luminaire file | 
| 1068 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1069 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 1070 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1071 |  |  | .B ies | 
| 1072 |  |  | .I pathname | 
| 1073 |  |  | [ | 
| 1074 |  |  | .B \-m | 
| 1075 |  |  | .I multiplier | 
| 1076 |  |  | ] | 
| 1077 |  |  | [ | 
| 1078 |  |  | .I transform | 
| 1079 |  |  | ] | 
| 1080 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1081 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 1082 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1083 |  |  | Load the IES standard luminaire information contained in the file | 
| 1084 |  |  | .I pathname. | 
| 1085 |  |  | If a | 
| 1086 |  |  | .I multiplier | 
| 1087 |  |  | is given, all candela values will be multiplied by this factor. | 
| 1088 |  |  | (This option must appear first if present.)\0 | 
| 1089 |  |  | If a | 
| 1090 |  |  | .I transform | 
| 1091 |  |  | specification is given, then it will be applied as though the | 
| 1092 |  |  | statement were enclosed by beginning and ending | 
| 1093 |  |  | .UL xf | 
| 1094 |  |  | entities with this transformation. | 
| 1095 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1096 |  |  | The | 
| 1097 |  |  | .I pathname | 
| 1098 |  |  | will be interpreted relative to the enclosing MGF file, and all | 
| 1099 |  |  | restrictions discussed under the | 
| 1100 |  |  | .UL i | 
| 1101 |  |  | entity also apply to the IES file name. | 
| 1102 |  |  | The suggested suffix is ".ies", but this has not been followed | 
| 1103 |  |  | consistently by lighting manufacturers. | 
| 1104 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1105 |  |  | EXAMPLE | 
| 1106 |  |  | .DS | 
| 1107 |  |  | # Insert 10 2x4' fluorescent troffers in two groups | 
| 1108 |  |  | ies cf9pr240.ies -t 3.6576 2.1336 2.74 -a 3 -t 2.4384 0 0 -a 2 -t 0 2.4384 0 | 
| 1109 |  |  | ies cf9pr240.ies -rz 90 -t 1.2192 1.8288 2.74 \\\\ | 
| 1110 |  |  | -a 2 -t 9.7536 0 0 -a 2 -t 0 3.048 0 | 
| 1111 |  |  | .DE | 
| 1112 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1113 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 1114 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1115 |  |  | .UL i, | 
| 1116 |  |  | .UL o, | 
| 1117 |  |  | .UL xf | 
| 1118 |  |  | .ds LH Color Entities | 
| 1119 |  |  | .ds RH C | 
| 1120 |  |  | .bp | 
| 1121 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1122 |  |  | NAME | 
| 1123 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1124 |  |  | c - get or set the current color context | 
| 1125 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1126 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 1127 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1128 |  |  | .B c | 
| 1129 |  |  | [ | 
| 1130 |  |  | .I id | 
| 1131 |  |  | [ | 
| 1132 |  |  | .B = | 
| 1133 |  |  | [ | 
| 1134 |  |  | .I template | 
| 1135 |  |  | ] | 
| 1136 |  |  | ] | 
| 1137 |  |  | ] | 
| 1138 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1139 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 1140 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1141 |  |  | If the | 
| 1142 |  |  | .UL c | 
| 1143 |  |  | keyword is given by itself, then it establishes the unnamed color | 
| 1144 |  |  | context, which is neutral (i.e. equal-energy) grey. | 
| 1145 |  |  | This context may be modified, but the changes will not be saved. | 
| 1146 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1147 |  |  | If the keyword is followed by an identifier | 
| 1148 |  |  | .I id, | 
| 1149 |  |  | then it reestablishes a previous context. | 
| 1150 |  |  | If the specified context was never defined, an error will result. | 
| 1151 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1152 |  |  | If the entity is given with an identifier | 
| 1153 |  |  | followed by an equals sign ('='), then a new context is established, | 
| 1154 |  |  | and cleared to the default neutral grey. | 
| 1155 |  |  | (Note that the equals sign must be separated from other | 
| 1156 |  |  | arguments by white space to be properly recognized.)\0 | 
| 1157 |  |  | If the equals sign is followed by a second identifier | 
| 1158 |  |  | .I template, | 
| 1159 |  |  | then this previously defined color will be used as a source of | 
| 1160 |  |  | default values rather than grey. | 
| 1161 |  |  | This is most useful for establishing a color alias. | 
| 1162 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1163 |  |  | EXAMPLE | 
| 1164 |  |  | .DS | 
| 1165 |  |  | # Define the color "red32" | 
| 1166 |  |  | c red32 = | 
| 1167 |  |  | cxy .42 .15 | 
| 1168 |  |  | # Make "cabinet_color" an alias for "red32" | 
| 1169 |  |  | c cabinet_color = red32 | 
| 1170 |  |  |  | 
| 1171 |  |  | # Later in another part of the description... | 
| 1172 |  |  |  | 
| 1173 |  |  | # Get our cabinet color | 
| 1174 |  |  | c cabinet_color | 
| 1175 |  |  | # Get the geometry | 
| 1176 |  |  | i cabgeom.mgf | 
| 1177 |  |  | .DE | 
| 1178 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1179 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 1180 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1181 |  |  | .UL cct, | 
| 1182 |  |  | .UL cmix, | 
| 1183 |  |  | .UL cspec, | 
| 1184 |  |  | .UL cxy, | 
| 1185 |  |  | .UL m | 
| 1186 |  |  | .ds RH CXY | 
| 1187 |  |  | .bp | 
| 1188 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1189 |  |  | NAME | 
| 1190 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1191 |  |  | cxy - set the CIE (x,y) chromaticity for the current color | 
| 1192 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1193 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 1194 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1195 |  |  | .B cxy | 
| 1196 |  |  | .I "x y" | 
| 1197 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1198 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 1199 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1200 |  |  | This entity sets the current color using (x,y) chromaticity | 
| 1201 |  |  | coordinates for the 1931 CIE standard 2 degree observer. | 
| 1202 |  |  | Legal values for | 
| 1203 |  |  | .I x | 
| 1204 |  |  | and | 
| 1205 |  |  | .I y | 
| 1206 |  |  | are greater than zero and sum to less than one, and more | 
| 1207 |  |  | specifically they must fit within the curve of the visible spectrum. | 
| 1208 |  |  | The | 
| 1209 |  |  | .I x | 
| 1210 |  |  | coordinate roughly corresponds to the red part of the spectrum and | 
| 1211 |  |  | the | 
| 1212 |  |  | .I y | 
| 1213 |  |  | coordinate corresponds to the green. | 
| 1214 |  |  | The CIE z coordinate is implicit, since it is equal to (1-x-y). | 
| 1215 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1216 |  |  | All colors in MGF are absolute, thus colorimeter measurements should | 
| 1217 |  |  | be conducted the same for surfaces as for light sources. | 
| 1218 |  |  | Applying a standard illuminant calculation is redundant and | 
| 1219 |  |  | introduces inaccuracies, and should therefore be avoided if | 
| 1220 |  |  | possible. | 
| 1221 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1222 |  |  | Conversion between CIE colors and those more commonly used in | 
| 1223 |  |  | computer graphics are described in the application notes section | 
| 1224 |  |  | 6.1.1. | 
| 1225 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1226 |  |  | EXAMPLE | 
| 1227 |  |  | .DS | 
| 1228 |  |  | # Set unnamed color context | 
| 1229 |  |  | c | 
| 1230 |  |  | # Set CIE chromaticity to a bluish hue | 
| 1231 |  |  | cxy .15 .2 | 
| 1232 |  |  | # Apply color to diffuse reflectance of 15% | 
| 1233 |  |  | rd .15 | 
| 1234 |  |  | .DE | 
| 1235 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1236 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 1237 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1238 |  |  | .UL c, | 
| 1239 |  |  | .UL cct, | 
| 1240 |  |  | .UL cmix, | 
| 1241 |  |  | .UL cspec | 
| 1242 |  |  | .ds RH CSPEC | 
| 1243 |  |  | .bp | 
| 1244 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1245 |  |  | NAME | 
| 1246 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1247 |  |  | cspec - set the relative spectrum for the current color | 
| 1248 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1249 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 1250 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1251 |  |  | .B cspec | 
| 1252 |  |  | .I "l_min l_max o1 o2 ... oN" | 
| 1253 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1254 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 1255 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1256 |  |  | Assign a relative spectrum measured between | 
| 1257 |  |  | .I l_min | 
| 1258 |  |  | and | 
| 1259 |  |  | .I l_max | 
| 1260 |  |  | nanometers at evenly spaced intervals. | 
| 1261 |  |  | The first value, | 
| 1262 |  |  | .I o1 | 
| 1263 |  |  | corresponds to the measurement at | 
| 1264 |  |  | .I l_min, | 
| 1265 |  |  | and the last value, | 
| 1266 |  |  | .I oN | 
| 1267 |  |  | corresponds to the measurement at | 
| 1268 |  |  | .I l_max. | 
| 1269 |  |  | Values in between are separated by | 
| 1270 |  |  | .I "(l_max-l_min)/(N-1)" | 
| 1271 |  |  | nanometers. | 
| 1272 | greg | 1.6 | All values should be non-negative unless defining a component for | 
| 1273 |  |  | complementary color mixing, and the spectrum outside of the | 
| 1274 | greg | 1.1 | specified range is assumed to be zero. | 
| 1275 |  |  | (The visible range is 380 to 780 nm.)\0 | 
| 1276 |  |  | The actual units and scale of the measurements do not matter, | 
| 1277 |  |  | since the total will be | 
| 1278 |  |  | normalized according to whatever the color is modifying | 
| 1279 |  |  | (e.g. photometric reflectance or emittance). | 
| 1280 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1281 |  |  | EXAMPLE | 
| 1282 |  |  | .DS | 
| 1283 |  |  | # Color measured at 10 nm increments from 400 to 700 | 
| 1284 |  |  | m reddish_cloth = | 
| 1285 |  |  | c | 
| 1286 |  |  | cspec 400 700 28.62 27.96 27.86 28.28 29.28 30.49 31.61 \\\\ | 
| 1287 |  |  | 32.27 32.26 31.83 31.13 30.07 29.14 29.03 29.69 \\\\ | 
| 1288 |  |  | 30.79 32.30 33.90 34.56 34.32 33.85 33.51 33.30 \\\\ | 
| 1289 |  |  | 33.43 34.06 35.26 37.04 39.41 42.55 46.46 51.00 | 
| 1290 |  |  | rd 0.3210 | 
| 1291 |  |  | .DE | 
| 1292 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1293 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 1294 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1295 |  |  | .UL c, | 
| 1296 |  |  | .UL cct, | 
| 1297 |  |  | .UL cmix, | 
| 1298 |  |  | .UL cxy | 
| 1299 |  |  | .ds RH CCT | 
| 1300 |  |  | .bp | 
| 1301 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1302 |  |  | NAME | 
| 1303 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1304 |  |  | cct - set the current color to a black body spectrum | 
| 1305 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1306 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 1307 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1308 |  |  | .B cct | 
| 1309 |  |  | .I temperature | 
| 1310 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1311 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 1312 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1313 |  |  | The | 
| 1314 |  |  | .UL cct | 
| 1315 |  |  | entity sets the current color to the spectrum of an ideal | 
| 1316 |  |  | black body radiating at | 
| 1317 |  |  | .I temperature | 
| 1318 |  |  | degrees Kelvin. | 
| 1319 |  |  | This is often the most convenient way to set the color of an | 
| 1320 |  |  | incandescent light source, but it is not recommended for | 
| 1321 |  |  | fluorescent lamps or other materials that do not fit a | 
| 1322 |  |  | black body spectrum. | 
| 1323 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1324 |  |  | EXAMPLE | 
| 1325 |  |  | .DS | 
| 1326 |  |  | # Define an incandescent source material at 3000 degrees K | 
| 1327 |  |  | m incand3000k = | 
| 1328 |  |  | c | 
| 1329 |  |  | cct 3000 | 
| 1330 |  |  | ed 1500 | 
| 1331 |  |  | .DE | 
| 1332 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1333 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 1334 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1335 |  |  | .UL c, | 
| 1336 |  |  | .UL cmix, | 
| 1337 |  |  | .UL cspec, | 
| 1338 |  |  | .UL cxy | 
| 1339 |  |  | .ds RH CMIX | 
| 1340 |  |  | .bp | 
| 1341 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1342 |  |  | NAME | 
| 1343 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1344 |  |  | cmix - mix two or more named colors to make the current color | 
| 1345 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1346 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 1347 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1348 |  |  | .B cmix | 
| 1349 |  |  | .I "w1 c1 w2 c2 ..." | 
| 1350 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1351 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 1352 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1353 |  |  | The | 
| 1354 |  |  | .UL cmix | 
| 1355 |  |  | entity sums together two or more named colors using specified | 
| 1356 |  |  | weighting coefficients, which correspond to the relative | 
| 1357 |  |  | photometric brightness of each. | 
| 1358 |  |  | As in all color specifications, the result is normalized so the | 
| 1359 |  |  | absolute scale of the weights does not matter, only their relative | 
| 1360 |  |  | values. | 
| 1361 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1362 |  |  | If any of the colors is a spectral quantity (i.e. from a | 
| 1363 |  |  | .UL cspec | 
| 1364 |  |  | or | 
| 1365 |  |  | .UL cct | 
| 1366 |  |  | entity), then all the colors are first converted to spectral | 
| 1367 |  |  | quantities. | 
| 1368 |  |  | This is done with an approximation for CIE (x,y) chromaticities, | 
| 1369 |  |  | which may be problematic depending on their values. | 
| 1370 |  |  | In general, it is safest to add together colors that are either | 
| 1371 |  |  | all spectral quantities or all CIE quantities. | 
| 1372 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1373 |  |  | EXAMPLE | 
| 1374 |  |  | .DS | 
| 1375 |  |  | # Define RGB primaries for a standard color monitor | 
| 1376 |  |  | c R = | 
| 1377 |  |  | cxy 0.640 0.330 | 
| 1378 |  |  | c G = | 
| 1379 |  |  | cxy 0.290 0.600 | 
| 1380 |  |  | c B = | 
| 1381 |  |  | cxy 0.150 0.060 | 
| 1382 |  |  | # Mix them together in appropriate amounts for white | 
| 1383 |  |  | c white = | 
| 1384 |  |  | cmix 0.265 R 0.670 G 0.065 B | 
| 1385 |  |  | .DE | 
| 1386 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1387 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 1388 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1389 |  |  | .UL c, | 
| 1390 |  |  | .UL cct, | 
| 1391 |  |  | .UL cspec, | 
| 1392 |  |  | .UL cxy | 
| 1393 |  |  | .ds LH Material Entities | 
| 1394 |  |  | .ds RH M | 
| 1395 |  |  | .bp | 
| 1396 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1397 |  |  | NAME | 
| 1398 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1399 |  |  | m - get or set the current material context | 
| 1400 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1401 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 1402 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1403 |  |  | .B m | 
| 1404 |  |  | [ | 
| 1405 |  |  | .I id | 
| 1406 |  |  | [ | 
| 1407 |  |  | .B = | 
| 1408 |  |  | [ | 
| 1409 |  |  | .I template | 
| 1410 |  |  | ] | 
| 1411 |  |  | ] | 
| 1412 |  |  | ] | 
| 1413 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1414 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 1415 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1416 |  |  | If the | 
| 1417 |  |  | .UL m | 
| 1418 |  |  | keyword is given by itself, then it establishes | 
| 1419 |  |  | the unnamed material context, which is a perfect two-sided black absorber. | 
| 1420 |  |  | This context may be modified, but the changes will not be saved. | 
| 1421 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1422 |  |  | If the keyword is followed by an identifier | 
| 1423 |  |  | .I id, | 
| 1424 |  |  | then it reestablishes a previous context. | 
| 1425 |  |  | If the specified context was never defined, an error will result. | 
| 1426 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1427 |  |  | If the entity is given with an identifier | 
| 1428 |  |  | followed by an equals sign ('='), then a new context is established, | 
| 1429 |  |  | and cleared to the default material. | 
| 1430 |  |  | (Note that the equals sign must be separated from other | 
| 1431 |  |  | arguments by white space to be properly recognized.)\0 | 
| 1432 |  |  | If the equals sign is followed by a second identifier | 
| 1433 |  |  | .I template, | 
| 1434 |  |  | then this previously defined material will be used as a source of | 
| 1435 |  |  | default values instead. | 
| 1436 |  |  | This may be used to establish a material alias, or to modify an | 
| 1437 |  |  | existing material and give it a new name. | 
| 1438 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1439 |  |  | The sum of the diffuse and specular reflectances and transmittances | 
| 1440 |  |  | must not be greater than one (with no negative values, obviously). | 
| 1441 |  |  | These values are assumed to be measured at normal incidence. | 
| 1442 |  |  | If an index of refraction is given, this may modify the balance between | 
| 1443 |  |  | diffuse and specular reflectance at other incident angles. | 
| 1444 |  |  | If the | 
| 1445 |  |  | material is one-sided (see | 
| 1446 |  |  | .UL sides | 
| 1447 |  |  | entity), then it may be a dielectric interface. | 
| 1448 |  |  | In this case, the specular transmittance given is that which would be | 
| 1449 |  |  | measured at normal incidence for a pane of the material 5 mm thick. | 
| 1450 |  |  | This is important for figuring the actual transmittance for non-planar | 
| 1451 |  |  | geometries assuming a uniformly absorbing medium. | 
| 1452 |  |  | (Diffuse transmittance will not be affected by thickness.)\0 | 
| 1453 |  |  | If the index of | 
| 1454 |  |  | refraction has an imaginary part, then the surface is a metal and this | 
| 1455 |  |  | implies other properties as well. | 
| 1456 |  |  | The default index of refraction is that of a vacuum, i.e. (1,0). | 
| 1457 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1458 |  |  | EXAMPLE | 
| 1459 |  |  | .DS | 
| 1460 |  |  | # Define a blue enamel paint | 
| 1461 |  |  | m blue_enamel = | 
| 1462 |  |  | c | 
| 1463 |  |  | cxy 0.2771 0.2975 | 
| 1464 |  |  | rd 0.5011 | 
| 1465 |  |  | c | 
| 1466 |  |  | rs 0.0100 0.0350 | 
| 1467 |  |  | # Assign blue_enamel to be the color of the south wall | 
| 1468 |  |  | m swall_mat = blue_enamel | 
| 1469 |  |  | # ... | 
| 1470 |  |  | # South wall face | 
| 1471 |  |  | m swall_mat | 
| 1472 |  |  | f sv1 sv2 sv3 sv4 | 
| 1473 |  |  | .DE | 
| 1474 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1475 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 1476 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1477 |  |  | .UL ed, | 
| 1478 |  |  | .UL ir, | 
| 1479 |  |  | .UL rd, | 
| 1480 |  |  | .UL rs, | 
| 1481 |  |  | .UL sides, | 
| 1482 |  |  | .UL td, | 
| 1483 |  |  | .UL ts | 
| 1484 |  |  | .ds RH SIDES | 
| 1485 |  |  | .bp | 
| 1486 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1487 |  |  | NAME | 
| 1488 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1489 |  |  | sides - set the number of sides for the current material | 
| 1490 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1491 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 1492 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1493 |  |  | .B sides | 
| 1494 |  |  | { | 
| 1495 |  |  | .B 1 | 
| 1496 |  |  | | | 
| 1497 |  |  | .B 2 | 
| 1498 |  |  | } | 
| 1499 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1500 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 1501 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1502 |  |  | The | 
| 1503 |  |  | .UL sides | 
| 1504 |  |  | entity is used to set the number of sides for the current material. | 
| 1505 |  |  | If a surface is two-sided, then it will appear | 
| 1506 |  |  | identical when viewed from either the front or the back. | 
| 1507 |  |  | If a surface is one-sided, | 
| 1508 |  |  | then it appears invisible when viewed from the back side. | 
| 1509 |  |  | This means | 
| 1510 |  |  | that a transmitting object will affect the light coming in through the | 
| 1511 |  |  | front surface and ignore the characteristics of the back surface, | 
| 1512 |  |  | unless the index of refraction is set. | 
| 1513 |  |  | If the index of refraction is set, then the object will act as a | 
| 1514 |  |  | solid piece of dielectric material. | 
| 1515 |  |  | In either case, the transmission properties of the exiting surface | 
| 1516 |  |  | should be the same as the incident surface for the model to be | 
| 1517 |  |  | physically valid. | 
| 1518 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1519 |  |  | The default number of sides is two. | 
| 1520 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1521 |  |  | EXAMPLE | 
| 1522 |  |  | .DS | 
| 1523 |  |  | # Describe a blue crystal ball | 
| 1524 |  |  | m blue_crystal = | 
| 1525 |  |  | ir 1.650000 0 | 
| 1526 |  |  | # Solid dielectrics must use one-sided materials | 
| 1527 |  |  | sides 1 | 
| 1528 |  |  | c | 
| 1529 |  |  | rs 0.0602 0 | 
| 1530 |  |  | c | 
| 1531 |  |  | cxy 0.3127 0.2881 | 
| 1532 |  |  | ts 0.6425 0 | 
| 1533 |  |  | v sc = | 
| 1534 |  |  | p 10 15 1.5 | 
| 1535 |  |  | sph sc .02 | 
| 1536 |  |  | .DE | 
| 1537 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1538 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 1539 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1540 |  |  | .UL ed, | 
| 1541 |  |  | .UL ir, | 
| 1542 |  |  | .UL m, | 
| 1543 |  |  | .UL rd, | 
| 1544 |  |  | .UL rs, | 
| 1545 |  |  | .UL td, | 
| 1546 |  |  | .UL ts | 
| 1547 |  |  | .ds RH RD | 
| 1548 |  |  | .bp | 
| 1549 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1550 |  |  | NAME | 
| 1551 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1552 |  |  | rd - set the diffuse reflectance for the current material | 
| 1553 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1554 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 1555 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1556 |  |  | .B rd | 
| 1557 |  |  | .I rho_d | 
| 1558 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1559 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 1560 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1561 |  |  | Set the diffuse reflectance for the current material to | 
| 1562 |  |  | .I rho_d | 
| 1563 |  |  | using the current color to determine the spectral characteristics. | 
| 1564 |  |  | This is the fraction of visible light that is reflected from a | 
| 1565 |  |  | surface equally in all directions according to Lambert's law, and is | 
| 1566 |  |  | often called the "Lambertian component." | 
| 1567 |  |  | Photometric reflectance is measured according to v(lambda) | 
| 1568 |  |  | response function of the 1931 CIE standard 2 | 
| 1569 |  |  | degree observer, and assumes an equal-energy white light source. | 
| 1570 |  |  | The value must be between zero and one, and may be further | 
| 1571 |  |  | restricted by the luminosity of the selected color. | 
| 1572 |  |  | (I.e. it is impossible to have a violet material with a photometric | 
| 1573 |  |  | reflectance close to one since the eye is less sensitive in this part | 
| 1574 |  |  | of the spectrum.)\0 | 
| 1575 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1576 |  |  | The default diffuse reflectance is zero. | 
| 1577 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1578 |  |  | EXAMPLE | 
| 1579 |  |  | .DS | 
| 1580 |  |  | # An off-white paint with 70% reflectance | 
| 1581 |  |  | m flat_white70 = | 
| 1582 |  |  | c | 
| 1583 |  |  | cxy .3632 .3420 | 
| 1584 |  |  | rd .70 | 
| 1585 |  |  | .DE | 
| 1586 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1587 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 1588 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1589 |  |  | .UL c, | 
| 1590 |  |  | .UL ed, | 
| 1591 |  |  | .UL ir, | 
| 1592 |  |  | .UL m, | 
| 1593 |  |  | .UL rs, | 
| 1594 |  |  | .UL sides, | 
| 1595 |  |  | .UL td, | 
| 1596 |  |  | .UL ts | 
| 1597 |  |  | .ds RH TD | 
| 1598 |  |  | .bp | 
| 1599 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1600 |  |  | NAME | 
| 1601 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1602 |  |  | td - set the diffuse transmittance for the current material | 
| 1603 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1604 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 1605 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1606 |  |  | .B td | 
| 1607 |  |  | .I tau_d | 
| 1608 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1609 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 1610 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1611 |  |  | Set the diffuse transmittance for the current material to | 
| 1612 |  |  | .I tau_d | 
| 1613 |  |  | using the current color to determine the spectral characteristics. | 
| 1614 |  |  | This is the fraction of visible light that is transmitted through a | 
| 1615 |  |  | surface equally in all (transmitted) directions. | 
| 1616 |  |  | Like reflectance, transmittance is measured according to the | 
| 1617 |  |  | standard v(lambda) curve, and assumes an equal-energy white light source. | 
| 1618 |  |  | It is probably not possible to create a material with a diffuse | 
| 1619 |  |  | transmittance above 50%, since well-diffused light will be reflected | 
| 1620 |  |  | as well. | 
| 1621 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1622 |  |  | The default diffuse transmittance is zero. | 
| 1623 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1624 |  |  | EXAMPLE | 
| 1625 |  |  | .DS | 
| 1626 |  |  | # Model a perfect spherical diffuser, i.e. light hitting \ | 
| 1627 |  |  | either side will be scattered equally in all directions | 
| 1628 |  |  | m wonderland_diffuser = | 
| 1629 |  |  | c | 
| 1630 |  |  | td .5 | 
| 1631 |  |  | rd .5 | 
| 1632 |  |  | .DE | 
| 1633 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1634 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 1635 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1636 |  |  | .UL c, | 
| 1637 |  |  | .UL ed, | 
| 1638 |  |  | .UL ir, | 
| 1639 |  |  | .UL m, | 
| 1640 |  |  | .UL rd, | 
| 1641 |  |  | .UL rs, | 
| 1642 |  |  | .UL sides, | 
| 1643 |  |  | .UL ts | 
| 1644 |  |  | .ds RH ED | 
| 1645 |  |  | .bp | 
| 1646 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1647 |  |  | NAME | 
| 1648 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1649 |  |  | ed - set the diffuse emittance for the current material | 
| 1650 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1651 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 1652 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1653 |  |  | .B ed | 
| 1654 |  |  | .I epsilon_d | 
| 1655 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1656 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 1657 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1658 |  |  | Set the diffuse emittance for the current material to | 
| 1659 |  |  | .I epsilon_d | 
| 1660 |  |  | lumens per square meter using the current color to determine the | 
| 1661 |  |  | spectral characteristics. | 
| 1662 |  |  | Note that this is emittance rather than exitance, and therefore | 
| 1663 |  |  | does not include reflected or transmitted light, which is a function | 
| 1664 |  |  | of the other material settings and the illuminated environment. | 
| 1665 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1666 |  |  | The total lumen output of a convex emitting object | 
| 1667 |  |  | is the radiating area of that object multiplied by its emittance. | 
| 1668 |  |  | Therefore, one can compute the appropriate | 
| 1669 |  |  | .I epsilon_d | 
| 1670 |  |  | value for an emitter by dividing the total lumen output by the | 
| 1671 |  |  | radiating area (in square meters). | 
| 1672 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1673 |  |  | The default emittance is zero. | 
| 1674 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1675 |  |  | EXAMPLE | 
| 1676 |  |  | .DS | 
| 1677 |  |  | # A 100-watt incandescent bulb (1600 lumens) modeled as a sphere | 
| 1678 |  |  | m | 
| 1679 |  |  | c | 
| 1680 | greg | 1.14 | cct 3000 | 
| 1681 | greg | 1.1 | ed 87712 | 
| 1682 |  |  | v cent = | 
| 1683 |  |  | p 0 0 0 | 
| 1684 |  |  | sph cent .0381 | 
| 1685 |  |  | .DE | 
| 1686 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1687 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 1688 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1689 |  |  | .UL c, | 
| 1690 |  |  | .UL ir, | 
| 1691 |  |  | .UL m, | 
| 1692 |  |  | .UL rd, | 
| 1693 |  |  | .UL rs, | 
| 1694 |  |  | .UL sides, | 
| 1695 |  |  | .UL td, | 
| 1696 |  |  | .UL ts | 
| 1697 |  |  | .ds RH RS | 
| 1698 |  |  | .bp | 
| 1699 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1700 |  |  | NAME | 
| 1701 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1702 |  |  | rs - set the specular reflectance for the current material | 
| 1703 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1704 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 1705 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1706 |  |  | .B rs | 
| 1707 |  |  | .I "rho_s alpha_r" | 
| 1708 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1709 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 1710 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1711 |  |  | Set the specular reflectance for the current material to | 
| 1712 |  |  | .I rho_s | 
| 1713 |  |  | using the current color to determine the spectral characteristics. | 
| 1714 |  |  | The surface roughness parameter is set to | 
| 1715 |  |  | .I alpha_r, | 
| 1716 |  |  | which is the RMS height of surface variations over the | 
| 1717 |  |  | autocorrelation distance (equivalent to RMS facet slope). | 
| 1718 |  |  | A roughness value of zero means a perfectly smooth surface, and | 
| 1719 |  |  | values greater than 0.2 are unusual. | 
| 1720 |  |  | (See application notes section 6.1.2 for a comparison between the | 
| 1721 |  |  | roughness parameter and Phong specular power.)\0 | 
| 1722 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1723 |  |  | The default specular reflectance is zero. | 
| 1724 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1725 |  |  | EXAMPLE | 
| 1726 |  |  | .DS | 
| 1727 |  |  | # Define a slightly rough brass metallic surface | 
| 1728 |  |  | m rough_brass = | 
| 1729 |  |  | c | 
| 1730 |  |  | cxy .3820 .4035 | 
| 1731 |  |  | # 30% specular, 9% diffuse | 
| 1732 |  |  | rs .30 .08 | 
| 1733 |  |  | rd .09 | 
| 1734 |  |  | .DE | 
| 1735 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1736 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 1737 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1738 |  |  | .UL c, | 
| 1739 |  |  | .UL ed, | 
| 1740 |  |  | .UL ir, | 
| 1741 |  |  | .UL m, | 
| 1742 |  |  | .UL rd, | 
| 1743 |  |  | .UL sides, | 
| 1744 |  |  | .UL td, | 
| 1745 |  |  | .UL ts | 
| 1746 |  |  | .ds RH TS | 
| 1747 |  |  | .bp | 
| 1748 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1749 |  |  | NAME | 
| 1750 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1751 |  |  | ts - set the specular transmittance for the current material | 
| 1752 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1753 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 1754 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1755 |  |  | .B ts | 
| 1756 |  |  | .I "tau_s alpha_t" | 
| 1757 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1758 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 1759 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1760 |  |  | Set the specular transmittance for the current material to | 
| 1761 |  |  | .I tau_s | 
| 1762 |  |  | using the current color to determine the spectral characteristics. | 
| 1763 |  |  | The effective surface roughness is set to | 
| 1764 |  |  | .I alpha_t. | 
| 1765 |  |  | Rays will be transmitted with the same distribution as they would | 
| 1766 |  |  | have been reflected with if this roughness value were given to the | 
| 1767 |  |  | .UL rs | 
| 1768 |  |  | entity. | 
| 1769 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1770 |  |  | The default specular transmittance is zero. | 
| 1771 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1772 |  |  | EXAMPLE | 
| 1773 |  |  | .DS | 
| 1774 |  |  | # Define a green glass material (58% transmittance) | 
| 1775 |  |  | m glass = | 
| 1776 |  |  | sides 2 | 
| 1777 |  |  | ir 1.52 0 | 
| 1778 |  |  | c | 
| 1779 |  |  | rs 0.0725 0 | 
| 1780 |  |  | c | 
| 1781 |  |  | cxy .23 .38 | 
| 1782 |  |  | ts 0.5815 0 | 
| 1783 |  |  | # Define an uncolored translucent plastic (40% transmittance) | 
| 1784 |  |  | m translucent = | 
| 1785 |  |  | sides 2 | 
| 1786 |  |  | ir 1.4 0 | 
| 1787 |  |  | c | 
| 1788 |  |  | rs .045 0 | 
| 1789 |  |  | ts .40 .05 | 
| 1790 |  |  | .DE | 
| 1791 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1792 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 1793 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1794 |  |  | .UL c, | 
| 1795 |  |  | .UL ed, | 
| 1796 |  |  | .UL ir, | 
| 1797 |  |  | .UL m, | 
| 1798 |  |  | .UL rd, | 
| 1799 |  |  | .UL rs, | 
| 1800 |  |  | .UL sides, | 
| 1801 |  |  | .UL td | 
| 1802 |  |  | .ds RH IR | 
| 1803 |  |  | .bp | 
| 1804 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1805 |  |  | NAME | 
| 1806 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1807 |  |  | ir - set the complex index of refraction for the current material | 
| 1808 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1809 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 1810 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1811 |  |  | .B ir | 
| 1812 |  |  | .I "n_real n_imag" | 
| 1813 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1814 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 1815 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1816 |  |  | Set the index of refraction for the current material to | 
| 1817 |  |  | .I (n_real,n_imag). | 
| 1818 |  |  | If the material is a dielectric (as opposed to metallic), then | 
| 1819 |  |  | .I n_imag | 
| 1820 |  |  | should be zero. | 
| 1821 |  |  | For solid dielectric objects, the material should be made one-sided. | 
| 1822 |  |  | If it is being used for thin objects, then a two-sided | 
| 1823 |  |  | material is appropriate. | 
| 1824 |  |  | (See the | 
| 1825 |  |  | .UL sides | 
| 1826 |  |  | entity.)\0 | 
| 1827 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1828 |  |  | The default index of refraction is that of a vacuum, (1,0). | 
| 1829 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1830 |  |  | EXAMPLE | 
| 1831 |  |  | .DS | 
| 1832 |  |  | # Define polished aluminum material | 
| 1833 |  |  | m polished_aluminum = | 
| 1834 |  |  | # Complex index of refraction (from physics table) | 
| 1835 |  |  | ir .770058 6.08351 | 
| 1836 |  |  | c | 
| 1837 |  |  | rs .75 0 | 
| 1838 |  |  | .DE | 
| 1839 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1840 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 1841 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1842 |  |  | .UL c, | 
| 1843 |  |  | .UL ed, | 
| 1844 |  |  | .UL m, | 
| 1845 |  |  | .UL rd, | 
| 1846 |  |  | .UL rs, | 
| 1847 |  |  | .UL sides, | 
| 1848 |  |  | .UL td, | 
| 1849 |  |  | .UL ts | 
| 1850 |  |  | .ds LH Vertex Entities | 
| 1851 |  |  | .ds RH V | 
| 1852 |  |  | .bp | 
| 1853 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1854 |  |  | NAME | 
| 1855 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1856 |  |  | v - get or set the current vertex context | 
| 1857 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1858 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 1859 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1860 |  |  | .B v | 
| 1861 |  |  | [ | 
| 1862 |  |  | .I id | 
| 1863 |  |  | [ | 
| 1864 |  |  | .B = | 
| 1865 |  |  | [ | 
| 1866 |  |  | .I template | 
| 1867 |  |  | ] | 
| 1868 |  |  | ] | 
| 1869 |  |  | ] | 
| 1870 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1871 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 1872 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1873 |  |  | If the | 
| 1874 |  |  | .UL v | 
| 1875 |  |  | keyword is given by itself, then it establishes | 
| 1876 |  |  | the unnamed vertex context, which is the origin with no normal. | 
| 1877 |  |  | This context may be modified, but the changes will not be saved. | 
| 1878 |  |  | (The unnamed vertex is never used except as a source of default | 
| 1879 |  |  | values since all geometric entities call their vertices by name.)\0 | 
| 1880 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1881 |  |  | If the keyword is followed by an identifier | 
| 1882 |  |  | .I id, | 
| 1883 |  |  | then it reestablishes a previous context. | 
| 1884 |  |  | If the specified context was never defined, an error will result. | 
| 1885 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1886 |  |  | If the entity is given with an identifier | 
| 1887 |  |  | followed by an equals sign ('='), then a new context is established, | 
| 1888 |  |  | and cleared to the default vertex (the origin). | 
| 1889 |  |  | (Note that the equals sign must be separated from other | 
| 1890 |  |  | arguments by white space to be properly recognized.)\0 | 
| 1891 |  |  | If the equals sign is followed by a second identifier | 
| 1892 |  |  | .I template, | 
| 1893 |  |  | then this previously defined vertex will be used as a source of | 
| 1894 |  |  | default values instead. | 
| 1895 |  |  | This may be used to establish a vertex alias, or to modify an | 
| 1896 |  |  | existing vertex and give it a new name. | 
| 1897 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1898 |  |  | A non-zero vertex normal must be given for | 
| 1899 |  |  | certain entities, specifically | 
| 1900 |  |  | .UL ring | 
| 1901 |  |  | and | 
| 1902 |  |  | .UL torus | 
| 1903 |  |  | require a normal direction. | 
| 1904 |  |  | An | 
| 1905 |  |  | .UL f | 
| 1906 | greg | 1.18 | or | 
| 1907 |  |  | .UL fh | 
| 1908 | greg | 1.1 | entity will interpolate vertex normals if given, and | 
| 1909 |  |  | use the polygon plane normal otherwise. | 
| 1910 |  |  | See the | 
| 1911 |  |  | .UL prism | 
| 1912 |  |  | entry for an explanation of how it interprets and uses vertex | 
| 1913 |  |  | normals. | 
| 1914 |  |  | The other entities ignore vertex normals if present. | 
| 1915 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1916 |  |  | The actual position and normal direction for a vertex is determined | 
| 1917 |  |  | at the time of use by a geometric entity. | 
| 1918 |  |  | Specifically, the transformation in effect at the time the vertex is | 
| 1919 |  |  | defined is irrelevant. | 
| 1920 |  |  | The only transformation that matters is the one that is applied to | 
| 1921 |  |  | the geometry itself. | 
| 1922 |  |  | This prevents double-transformation of vertices and allows one set | 
| 1923 |  |  | of vertices to be used for multiple purposes, e.g. the front and | 
| 1924 |  |  | back sides of a drawer. | 
| 1925 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1926 |  |  | EXAMPLE | 
| 1927 |  |  | .DS | 
| 1928 |  |  | # Make a capped cylinder | 
| 1929 |  |  | v end1 = | 
| 1930 |  |  | p 0 0 0 | 
| 1931 |  |  | n 0 0 -1 | 
| 1932 |  |  | v end2 = | 
| 1933 |  |  | p 0 0 1 | 
| 1934 |  |  | cyl end1 1.2 end2 | 
| 1935 |  |  | # Forgot normal for end2 | 
| 1936 |  |  | v end2 | 
| 1937 |  |  | n 0 0 1 | 
| 1938 |  |  | ring end1 0 1.2 | 
| 1939 |  |  | ring end2 0 1.2 | 
| 1940 |  |  | .DE | 
| 1941 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1942 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 1943 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1944 |  |  | .UL cone, | 
| 1945 |  |  | .UL cyl, | 
| 1946 |  |  | .UL f, | 
| 1947 | greg | 1.18 | .UL fh, | 
| 1948 | greg | 1.1 | .UL n, | 
| 1949 |  |  | .UL p, | 
| 1950 |  |  | .UL prism, | 
| 1951 |  |  | .UL ring, | 
| 1952 |  |  | .UL sph, | 
| 1953 |  |  | .UL torus | 
| 1954 |  |  | .ds RH P | 
| 1955 |  |  | .bp | 
| 1956 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1957 |  |  | NAME | 
| 1958 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1959 |  |  | p - set the point location for the current vertex | 
| 1960 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1961 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 1962 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1963 |  |  | .B p | 
| 1964 |  |  | .I "px py pz" | 
| 1965 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1966 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 1967 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1968 |  |  | Set the 3-dimensional position for the current vertex to | 
| 1969 |  |  | .I (px,py,pz). | 
| 1970 |  |  | The actual position of the vertex will be determined by the | 
| 1971 |  |  | transformation in effect at the time the vertex is applied to a | 
| 1972 |  |  | geometric surface entity. | 
| 1973 |  |  | The transform current when the position is set is irrelevant. | 
| 1974 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1975 |  |  | The default vertex position is the origin, (0,0,0). | 
| 1976 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1977 |  |  | EXAMPLE | 
| 1978 |  |  | .DS | 
| 1979 |  |  | # Make a small circle of 6 spheres | 
| 1980 |  |  | v scent = | 
| 1981 |  |  | p 1 0 0 | 
| 1982 |  |  | xf -a 6 -rz 60 | 
| 1983 |  |  | sph scent .05 | 
| 1984 |  |  | xf | 
| 1985 |  |  | .DE | 
| 1986 |  |  | .SH | 
| 1987 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 1988 |  |  | .LP | 
| 1989 |  |  | .UL cone, | 
| 1990 |  |  | .UL cyl, | 
| 1991 |  |  | .UL f, | 
| 1992 | greg | 1.18 | .UL fh, | 
| 1993 | greg | 1.1 | .UL n, | 
| 1994 |  |  | .UL prism, | 
| 1995 |  |  | .UL ring, | 
| 1996 |  |  | .UL sph, | 
| 1997 |  |  | .UL torus, | 
| 1998 |  |  | .UL v | 
| 1999 |  |  | .ds RH N | 
| 2000 |  |  | .bp | 
| 2001 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2002 |  |  | NAME | 
| 2003 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2004 |  |  | n - set the surface normal direction for the current vertex | 
| 2005 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2006 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 2007 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2008 |  |  | .B n | 
| 2009 |  |  | .I "dx dy dz" | 
| 2010 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2011 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 2012 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2013 |  |  | Set the 3-dimensional surface normal for the current vertex to the | 
| 2014 |  |  | normalized vector along | 
| 2015 |  |  | .I (dx,dy,dz). | 
| 2016 |  |  | If this vector is zero, then the surface normal is effectively | 
| 2017 |  |  | unset. | 
| 2018 |  |  | The actual surface normal orientation of the vertex will be determined | 
| 2019 |  |  | by the transformation in effect at the time the vertex is applied to a | 
| 2020 |  |  | geometric surface entity. | 
| 2021 |  |  | The current transform when the normal is set is irrelevant. | 
| 2022 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2023 |  |  | The default vertex normal is the zero vector (i.e. no normal). | 
| 2024 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2025 |  |  | EXAMPLE | 
| 2026 |  |  | .DS | 
| 2027 |  |  | # Make a chain of 10 interlocking doughnuts | 
| 2028 |  |  | v tcent = | 
| 2029 |  |  | p 0 0 0 | 
| 2030 |  |  | n 0 1 0 | 
| 2031 |  |  | xf -a 10 -rx 90 -t .2 0 0 | 
| 2032 |  |  | torus tcent .1 .2 | 
| 2033 |  |  | xf | 
| 2034 |  |  | .DE | 
| 2035 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2036 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 2037 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2038 |  |  | .UL f, | 
| 2039 | greg | 1.18 | .UL fh, | 
| 2040 | greg | 1.1 | .UL p, | 
| 2041 |  |  | .UL prism, | 
| 2042 |  |  | .UL ring, | 
| 2043 |  |  | .UL torus, | 
| 2044 |  |  | .UL v | 
| 2045 |  |  | .ds LH Geometric Entities | 
| 2046 |  |  | .ds RH F | 
| 2047 |  |  | .bp | 
| 2048 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2049 |  |  | NAME | 
| 2050 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2051 |  |  | f - create an N-sided polygonal face | 
| 2052 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2053 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 2054 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2055 |  |  | .B f | 
| 2056 |  |  | .I "v1 v2 ... vN" | 
| 2057 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2058 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 2059 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2060 |  |  | Create a polygonal face made of the current material | 
| 2061 |  |  | by connecting the named vertices in order, and connecting the last | 
| 2062 |  |  | vertex to the first. | 
| 2063 |  |  | There must be at least three vertices, and if any vertex is undefined, | 
| 2064 |  |  | an error will result. | 
| 2065 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2066 |  |  | The surface orientation is determined by the right-hand rule; when | 
| 2067 |  |  | the curl of the fingers follows the given order of the vertices, the | 
| 2068 |  |  | surface normal points in the thumb direction. | 
| 2069 |  |  | Face vertices should be coplanar, though this is difficult to guarantee | 
| 2070 |  |  | in a 3-dimensional specification. | 
| 2071 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2072 |  |  | If any vertices have associated surface normals, they will be used | 
| 2073 |  |  | instead of the average plane normal, though it is safest to specify | 
| 2074 |  |  | either all normals or no normals, and to stick with triangles | 
| 2075 |  |  | when normals are used. | 
| 2076 |  |  | Also, specified normals should point in the general direction of the | 
| 2077 |  |  | surface for best results. | 
| 2078 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2079 | greg | 1.16 | There is no explicit representation of holes in this entity, but see | 
| 2080 |  |  | the | 
| 2081 |  |  | .UL fh | 
| 2082 |  |  | entity for an alternative specification. | 
| 2083 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2084 |  |  | A hole may be represented implicitly in a face entity | 
| 2085 |  |  | by connecting vertices to form "seams." | 
| 2086 |  |  | For | 
| 2087 | greg | 1.1 | example, a wall with a window in it might look as shown in Figure 1. | 
| 2088 |  |  | In many systems, the wall itself would be represented with the first | 
| 2089 |  |  | list of vertices, (v1,v2,v3,v4) and the hole associated with that | 
| 2090 | greg | 1.16 | wall as a second set of vertices (v5,v6,v7,v8). | 
| 2091 |  |  | Using the face entity, we must | 
| 2092 | greg | 1.1 | give the whole thing as a single polygon, connecting the vertices so | 
| 2093 |  |  | as to create a "seam," as shown in Figure 2. | 
| 2094 | greg | 1.16 | This could be written as "f v1 v2 v3 v4 v5 v6 v7 v8 v5 v4". | 
| 2095 | greg | 1.1 | .LP | 
| 2096 |  |  | It is very important that the order of the hole be opposite to the | 
| 2097 |  |  | order of the outer perimeter, otherwise the polygon will be | 
| 2098 |  |  | "twisted" on top of itself.  Note also that the seam was traversed | 
| 2099 |  |  | in both directions, once going from v4 to v5, and again returning | 
| 2100 |  |  | from v5 to v4.  This is a necessary condition for a proper seam. | 
| 2101 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2102 |  |  | The choice of vertices to make into a seam is somewhat arbitrary, but | 
| 2103 |  |  | some rendering systems may not give sane results if you cross over a | 
| 2104 |  |  | hole with part of your seam.  If we had chosen to create the seam | 
| 2105 |  |  | between v2 and v5 in the above example instead of v4 and v5, the seam | 
| 2106 |  |  | would cross our hole and may not render correctly\(dg. | 
| 2107 |  |  | .FS | 
| 2108 |  |  | \(dgFor systems that | 
| 2109 |  |  | are sensitive to this, it is probably safest for their MGF | 
| 2110 |  |  | loader/translator to re-expresses seams in terms of holes again, which can | 
| 2111 |  |  | be done easily so long as vertices are shared in the fashion shown. | 
| 2112 |  |  | .FE | 
| 2113 |  |  | .bp | 
| 2114 |  |  | Replace this page with the first page from "figures.ps". | 
| 2115 |  |  | .bp | 
| 2116 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2117 |  |  | EXAMPLE | 
| 2118 |  |  | .DS | 
| 2119 |  |  | # Make a pyramid | 
| 2120 |  |  | v apex = | 
| 2121 |  |  | p 1 1 1 | 
| 2122 |  |  | v base0 = | 
| 2123 |  |  | p 0 0 0 | 
| 2124 |  |  | v base1 = | 
| 2125 |  |  | p 0 2 0 | 
| 2126 |  |  | v base2 = | 
| 2127 |  |  | p 2 2 0 | 
| 2128 |  |  | v base3 = | 
| 2129 |  |  | p 2 0 0 | 
| 2130 |  |  | # Bottom | 
| 2131 |  |  | f base0 base1 base2 base3 | 
| 2132 |  |  | # Sides | 
| 2133 |  |  | f base0 apex base1 | 
| 2134 |  |  | f base1 apex base2 | 
| 2135 |  |  | f base2 apex base3 | 
| 2136 |  |  | f base3 apex base0 | 
| 2137 |  |  | .DE | 
| 2138 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2139 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 2140 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2141 |  |  | .UL cone, | 
| 2142 |  |  | .UL cyl, | 
| 2143 | greg | 1.16 | .UL fh, | 
| 2144 |  |  | .UL m, | 
| 2145 |  |  | .UL prism, | 
| 2146 |  |  | .UL ring, | 
| 2147 |  |  | .UL sph, | 
| 2148 |  |  | .UL torus, | 
| 2149 |  |  | .UL v | 
| 2150 |  |  | .ds RH FH | 
| 2151 |  |  | .bp | 
| 2152 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2153 |  |  | NAME | 
| 2154 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2155 |  |  | fh - create a polygonal face with explicit holes | 
| 2156 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2157 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 2158 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2159 |  |  | .B fh | 
| 2160 |  |  | .I "p1 p2 ... - h1.1 h1.2 ... - h2.1 h2.2 ..." | 
| 2161 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2162 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 2163 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2164 |  |  | Create a polygonal face with optional holes made of the current material. | 
| 2165 |  |  | The first contour is the outer perimeter, with vertices given in | 
| 2166 |  |  | counter-clockwise order as seen from the front side (the same as the | 
| 2167 |  |  | .UL f | 
| 2168 |  |  | entity). | 
| 2169 |  |  | A hole is indicated by a hyphen ('-') followed by the hole's | 
| 2170 |  |  | vertices, given in clockwise order as seen from the front side. | 
| 2171 |  |  | Multiple hole contours are separated by additional hyphens. | 
| 2172 |  |  | There must be at least three vertices for each contour, and the | 
| 2173 |  |  | last vertex is implicitly connected to the first. | 
| 2174 |  |  | If any vertex is undefined, an error will result. | 
| 2175 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2176 |  |  | If any vertices have associated surface normals, they will be used | 
| 2177 |  |  | instead of the average plane normal, though it is safest to specify | 
| 2178 |  |  | either all normals or no normals, and to stick with triangles | 
| 2179 |  |  | when normals are used. | 
| 2180 |  |  | Also, specified normals should point in the general direction of the | 
| 2181 |  |  | surface for best results. | 
| 2182 | greg | 1.18 | .LP | 
| 2183 |  |  | Vertices should not be shared between any two contours. | 
| 2184 |  |  | I.e., a hole should not share a vertex or edge with the perimeter or | 
| 2185 |  |  | another hole, or incorrect rendering may result. | 
| 2186 | greg | 1.16 | .SH | 
| 2187 |  |  | EXAMPLE | 
| 2188 |  |  | .DS | 
| 2189 |  |  | # Make a wall with a window using an explicit hole. | 
| 2190 |  |  | # (See Figures 1 and 2.) | 
| 2191 |  |  | fh v1 v2 v3 v4 - v5 v6 v7 v8 | 
| 2192 |  |  | .DE | 
| 2193 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2194 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 2195 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2196 |  |  | .UL cone, | 
| 2197 |  |  | .UL cyl, | 
| 2198 |  |  | .UL f, | 
| 2199 | greg | 1.1 | .UL m, | 
| 2200 |  |  | .UL prism, | 
| 2201 |  |  | .UL ring, | 
| 2202 |  |  | .UL sph, | 
| 2203 |  |  | .UL torus, | 
| 2204 |  |  | .UL v | 
| 2205 |  |  | .ds RH SPH | 
| 2206 |  |  | .bp | 
| 2207 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2208 |  |  | NAME | 
| 2209 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2210 |  |  | sph - create a sphere | 
| 2211 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2212 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 2213 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2214 |  |  | .B sph | 
| 2215 |  |  | .I "vc rad" | 
| 2216 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2217 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 2218 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2219 |  |  | Create a sphere made of the current material with its center at the | 
| 2220 |  |  | named vertex | 
| 2221 |  |  | .I vc | 
| 2222 |  |  | and a radius of | 
| 2223 |  |  | .I rad. | 
| 2224 |  |  | If the vertex is undefined an error will result. | 
| 2225 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2226 |  |  | The surface normal is usually directed outward, but will be directed | 
| 2227 |  |  | inward if the given radius is negative. | 
| 2228 |  |  | (This typically matters only for one-sided materials.)\0 | 
| 2229 |  |  | A zero radius is illegal. | 
| 2230 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2231 |  |  | EXAMPLE | 
| 2232 |  |  | .DS | 
| 2233 |  |  | # Create a thick glass sphere with a hollow inside | 
| 2234 |  |  | m glass = | 
| 2235 |  |  | sides 1 | 
| 2236 |  |  | ir 1.52 0 | 
| 2237 |  |  | c | 
| 2238 |  |  | rs .06 0 | 
| 2239 |  |  | ts .88 0 | 
| 2240 |  |  | v cent = | 
| 2241 |  |  | p 0 0 1.1 | 
| 2242 |  |  | # The outer shell | 
| 2243 |  |  | sph cent .1 | 
| 2244 |  |  | # The inner bubble | 
| 2245 |  |  | sph cent -.08 | 
| 2246 |  |  | .DE | 
| 2247 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2248 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 2249 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2250 |  |  | .UL cone, | 
| 2251 |  |  | .UL cyl, | 
| 2252 |  |  | .UL f, | 
| 2253 | greg | 1.18 | .UL fh, | 
| 2254 | greg | 1.1 | .UL m, | 
| 2255 |  |  | .UL prism, | 
| 2256 |  |  | .UL ring, | 
| 2257 |  |  | .UL torus, | 
| 2258 |  |  | .UL v | 
| 2259 |  |  | .ds RH CYL | 
| 2260 |  |  | .bp | 
| 2261 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2262 |  |  | NAME | 
| 2263 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2264 |  |  | cyl - create an open-ended, truncated right cylinder | 
| 2265 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2266 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 2267 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2268 |  |  | .B cyl | 
| 2269 |  |  | .I "v1 rad v2" | 
| 2270 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2271 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 2272 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2273 |  |  | Create a truncated right cylinder of radius | 
| 2274 |  |  | .I rad | 
| 2275 |  |  | using the current material, starting at the named vertex | 
| 2276 |  |  | .I v1 | 
| 2277 |  |  | and continuing to | 
| 2278 |  |  | .I v2. | 
| 2279 |  |  | The ends will be open, but may be capped using the | 
| 2280 |  |  | .UL ring | 
| 2281 |  |  | entity if desired. | 
| 2282 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2283 |  |  | The surface normal will usually be directed outward, but may be | 
| 2284 |  |  | directed inward by giving a negative value for | 
| 2285 |  |  | .I rad. | 
| 2286 |  |  | A zero radius is illegal, and | 
| 2287 |  |  | .I v1 | 
| 2288 |  |  | cannot equal | 
| 2289 |  |  | .I v2. | 
| 2290 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2291 |  |  | EXAMPLE | 
| 2292 |  |  | .DS | 
| 2293 |  |  | # A stylus with one rounded and one pointed end | 
| 2294 |  |  | o stylus | 
| 2295 |  |  | v vtip0 = | 
| 2296 |  |  | p 0 0 0 | 
| 2297 |  |  | v vtip1 = | 
| 2298 |  |  | p 0 0 .005 | 
| 2299 |  |  | v vend = | 
| 2300 |  |  | p 0 0 .05 | 
| 2301 | greg | 1.5 | cyl vtip1 .0015 vend | 
| 2302 | greg | 1.1 | sph vend .0015 | 
| 2303 |  |  | cone vtip0 0 vtip1 .0015 | 
| 2304 |  |  | o | 
| 2305 |  |  | .DE | 
| 2306 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2307 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 2308 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2309 |  |  | .UL cone, | 
| 2310 |  |  | .UL f, | 
| 2311 | greg | 1.18 | .UL fh, | 
| 2312 | greg | 1.1 | .UL m, | 
| 2313 |  |  | .UL prism, | 
| 2314 |  |  | .UL ring, | 
| 2315 |  |  | .UL sph, | 
| 2316 |  |  | .UL torus, | 
| 2317 |  |  | .UL v | 
| 2318 |  |  | .ds RH CONE | 
| 2319 |  |  | .bp | 
| 2320 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2321 |  |  | NAME | 
| 2322 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2323 |  |  | cone - create an open-ended, truncated right cone | 
| 2324 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2325 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 2326 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2327 |  |  | .B cone | 
| 2328 |  |  | .I "v1 rad1 v2 rad2" | 
| 2329 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2330 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 2331 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2332 |  |  | Create a truncated right cone using the current material. | 
| 2333 |  |  | The starting radius is | 
| 2334 |  |  | .I rad1 | 
| 2335 |  |  | at | 
| 2336 |  |  | .I v1 | 
| 2337 |  |  | and the ending radius is | 
| 2338 |  |  | is | 
| 2339 |  |  | .I rad2 | 
| 2340 |  |  | at | 
| 2341 |  |  | .I v2. | 
| 2342 |  |  | The ends will be open, but may be capped using the | 
| 2343 |  |  | .UL ring | 
| 2344 |  |  | entity if desired. | 
| 2345 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2346 |  |  | The surface normal will usually be directed outward, but may be | 
| 2347 |  |  | directed inward by giving negative values for both radii. | 
| 2348 |  |  | (It is illegal for the signs of the two radii to disagree.)\0 | 
| 2349 |  |  | One but not both radii may be zero, indicating that the cone comes | 
| 2350 |  |  | to a point. | 
| 2351 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2352 |  |  | Although it is not strictly forbidden to have equal cone radii, the | 
| 2353 |  |  | .UL cyl | 
| 2354 |  |  | entity should be used in such cases. | 
| 2355 |  |  | Likewise, the | 
| 2356 |  |  | .UL ring | 
| 2357 |  |  | entity must be used if | 
| 2358 |  |  | .I v1 | 
| 2359 |  |  | and | 
| 2360 |  |  | .I v2 | 
| 2361 |  |  | are equal. | 
| 2362 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2363 |  |  | EXAMPLE | 
| 2364 |  |  | .DS | 
| 2365 |  |  | # A parasol | 
| 2366 |  |  | o parasol | 
| 2367 |  |  | v v1 = | 
| 2368 |  |  | p 0 0 0 | 
| 2369 |  |  | v v2 = | 
| 2370 |  |  | p 0 0 .75 | 
| 2371 |  |  | v v3 = | 
| 2372 |  |  | p 0 0 .7 | 
| 2373 |  |  | m handle_mat | 
| 2374 |  |  | cyl v1 .002 v2 | 
| 2375 |  |  | m parasol_paper | 
| 2376 |  |  | cyl v2 0 v3 .33 | 
| 2377 |  |  | o | 
| 2378 |  |  | .DE | 
| 2379 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2380 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 2381 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2382 |  |  | .UL cyl, | 
| 2383 |  |  | .UL f, | 
| 2384 | greg | 1.18 | .UL fh, | 
| 2385 | greg | 1.1 | .UL m, | 
| 2386 |  |  | .UL prism, | 
| 2387 |  |  | .UL ring, | 
| 2388 |  |  | .UL sph, | 
| 2389 |  |  | .UL torus, | 
| 2390 |  |  | .UL v | 
| 2391 |  |  | .ds RH PRISM | 
| 2392 |  |  | .bp | 
| 2393 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2394 |  |  | NAME | 
| 2395 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2396 |  |  | prism - create a closed right prism | 
| 2397 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2398 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 2399 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2400 |  |  | .B prism | 
| 2401 |  |  | .I "v1 v2 ... vN length" | 
| 2402 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2403 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 2404 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2405 |  |  | Create a closed right prism using the current material. | 
| 2406 |  |  | One end face will be enclosed by the named vertices, and the | 
| 2407 |  |  | opposite end face will be a mirror image at a distance | 
| 2408 |  |  | .I length | 
| 2409 |  |  | from the original. | 
| 2410 |  |  | The edges will be extruded into N quadrilaterals connecting | 
| 2411 |  |  | the two end faces. | 
| 2412 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2413 |  |  | The order of vertices determines the original face orientation | 
| 2414 |  |  | according to the right-hand rule as explained for the | 
| 2415 |  |  | .UL f | 
| 2416 |  |  | entity. | 
| 2417 |  |  | Normally, the prism is extruded in the direction opposite to the | 
| 2418 |  |  | original surface normal, resulting in faces that all point outward. | 
| 2419 |  |  | If the specified | 
| 2420 |  |  | .I length | 
| 2421 |  |  | is negative, the prism will be extruded above the original face | 
| 2422 |  |  | and all surface normals will point inward. | 
| 2423 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2424 |  |  | If the vertices have associated normals, they are applied to the | 
| 2425 |  |  | side faces only, and should generally point in the appropriate | 
| 2426 |  |  | direction (i.e. in or out depending on whether | 
| 2427 |  |  | .I length | 
| 2428 |  |  | is negative or positive). | 
| 2429 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2430 |  |  | EXAMPLE | 
| 2431 |  |  | .DS | 
| 2432 |  |  | # Make a unit cube starting at the origin and \\\\ | 
| 2433 |  |  | extending to the positive octant | 
| 2434 |  |  | v cv0 = | 
| 2435 |  |  | p 0 0 0 | 
| 2436 |  |  | v cv1 = | 
| 2437 |  |  | p 0 1 0 | 
| 2438 |  |  | v cv2 = | 
| 2439 |  |  | p 1 1 0 | 
| 2440 |  |  | v cv3 = | 
| 2441 |  |  | p 1 0 0 | 
| 2442 |  |  | # Right hand rule has original face looking in -Z direction | 
| 2443 |  |  | prism cv0 cv1 cv2 cv3 1 | 
| 2444 |  |  | .DE | 
| 2445 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2446 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 2447 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2448 |  |  | .UL cyl, | 
| 2449 |  |  | .UL cone, | 
| 2450 |  |  | .UL f, | 
| 2451 | greg | 1.18 | .UL fh, | 
| 2452 | greg | 1.1 | .UL m, | 
| 2453 |  |  | .UL ring, | 
| 2454 |  |  | .UL sph, | 
| 2455 |  |  | .UL torus, | 
| 2456 |  |  | .UL v | 
| 2457 |  |  | .ds RH RING | 
| 2458 |  |  | .bp | 
| 2459 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2460 |  |  | NAME | 
| 2461 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2462 |  |  | ring - create a circular ring with inner and outer radii | 
| 2463 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2464 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 2465 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2466 | greg | 1.7 | .B ring | 
| 2467 | greg | 1.1 | .I "vc rmin rmax" | 
| 2468 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2469 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 2470 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2471 |  |  | Create a circular face of the current material centered on the named | 
| 2472 |  |  | vertex | 
| 2473 |  |  | .I vc | 
| 2474 |  |  | with an inner radius of | 
| 2475 |  |  | .I rmin | 
| 2476 |  |  | and an outer radius of | 
| 2477 |  |  | .I rmax. | 
| 2478 |  |  | The surface orientation is determined by the normal vector | 
| 2479 |  |  | associated with | 
| 2480 |  |  | .I vc. | 
| 2481 |  |  | If this vertex is undefined or has no normal, an error will result. | 
| 2482 |  |  | The minimum radius may be equal to but not less than zero, and the | 
| 2483 |  |  | maximum radius must be strictly greater than the minimum. | 
| 2484 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2485 |  |  | EXAMPLE | 
| 2486 |  |  | .DS | 
| 2487 |  |  | # The proverbial brass ring | 
| 2488 |  |  | o brass_ring | 
| 2489 |  |  | m brass | 
| 2490 |  |  | v end1 = | 
| 2491 |  |  | p 0 -.005 0 | 
| 2492 |  |  | n 0 -1 0 | 
| 2493 |  |  | v end2 = | 
| 2494 |  |  | p 0 .005 0 | 
| 2495 |  |  | n 0 1 0 | 
| 2496 |  |  | ring end1 .02 .03 | 
| 2497 |  |  | cyl end1 .03 end2 | 
| 2498 |  |  | ring end2 .02 .03 | 
| 2499 |  |  | cyl end2 -.02 end1 | 
| 2500 |  |  | o | 
| 2501 |  |  | .DE | 
| 2502 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2503 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 2504 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2505 |  |  | .UL cyl, | 
| 2506 |  |  | .UL cone, | 
| 2507 |  |  | .UL f, | 
| 2508 | greg | 1.18 | .UL fh, | 
| 2509 | greg | 1.1 | .UL m, | 
| 2510 |  |  | .UL prism, | 
| 2511 |  |  | .UL sph, | 
| 2512 |  |  | .UL torus, | 
| 2513 |  |  | .UL v | 
| 2514 |  |  | .ds RH TORUS | 
| 2515 |  |  | .bp | 
| 2516 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2517 |  |  | NAME | 
| 2518 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2519 |  |  | torus - create a regular torus | 
| 2520 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2521 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 2522 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2523 |  |  | .B torus | 
| 2524 |  |  | .I "vc rmin rmax" | 
| 2525 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2526 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 2527 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2528 |  |  | Create a torus of the current material centered on the named vertex | 
| 2529 |  |  | .I vc | 
| 2530 |  |  | with an inner radius of | 
| 2531 |  |  | .I rmin | 
| 2532 |  |  | and an outer radius of | 
| 2533 |  |  | .I rmax. | 
| 2534 |  |  | The plane of the torus will be perpendicular to the normal vector | 
| 2535 |  |  | associated with | 
| 2536 |  |  | .I vc. | 
| 2537 |  |  | If this vertex is undefined or has no normal, an error will result. | 
| 2538 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2539 |  |  | If a torus with an inward facing surface normal is desired, | 
| 2540 |  |  | .I rmin | 
| 2541 |  |  | and | 
| 2542 |  |  | .I rmax | 
| 2543 |  |  | may be negative. | 
| 2544 |  |  | The minimum radius may be zero, but may not be negative when | 
| 2545 |  |  | .I rmax | 
| 2546 |  |  | is positive or vice versa. | 
| 2547 |  |  | The magnitude or | 
| 2548 |  |  | .I rmax | 
| 2549 |  |  | must always be strictly greater than that of | 
| 2550 |  |  | .I rmin. | 
| 2551 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2552 |  |  | EXAMPLE | 
| 2553 |  |  | .DS | 
| 2554 |  |  | # The proverbial brass ring -- easy grip version | 
| 2555 |  |  | o brass_ring | 
| 2556 |  |  | m brass | 
| 2557 |  |  | v center = | 
| 2558 |  |  | p 0 0 0 | 
| 2559 |  |  | n 0 1 0 | 
| 2560 |  |  | torus center .02 .03 | 
| 2561 |  |  | o | 
| 2562 |  |  | .DE | 
| 2563 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2564 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 2565 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2566 |  |  | .UL cyl, | 
| 2567 |  |  | .UL cone, | 
| 2568 |  |  | .UL f, | 
| 2569 | greg | 1.18 | .UL fh, | 
| 2570 | greg | 1.1 | .UL m, | 
| 2571 |  |  | .UL prism, | 
| 2572 |  |  | .UL ring, | 
| 2573 |  |  | .UL sph, | 
| 2574 |  |  | .UL v | 
| 2575 |  |  | .ds RH | 
| 2576 |  |  | .ds LH | 
| 2577 |  |  | .bp | 
| 2578 |  |  | .NH | 
| 2579 |  |  | MGF Translators | 
| 2580 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2581 | greg | 1.13 | Initially, there are six translators for MGF data, and | 
| 2582 |  |  | three of these are distributed with the MGF parser itself, | 
| 2583 |  |  | .I mgfilt, | 
| 2584 |  |  | .I mgf2inv | 
| 2585 | greg | 1.12 | and | 
| 2586 | greg | 1.13 | .I 3ds2mgf. | 
| 2587 | greg | 1.1 | Two of the other translators, | 
| 2588 |  |  | .I mgf2rad | 
| 2589 |  |  | and | 
| 2590 |  |  | .I rad2mgf | 
| 2591 |  |  | convert between MGF and the Radiance scene description language, | 
| 2592 |  |  | and are distributed for free with the rest of the Radiance | 
| 2593 |  |  | package\(dg. | 
| 2594 |  |  | .FS | 
| 2595 |  |  | \(dgRadiance is available by anonymous ftp from hobbes.lbl.gov and | 
| 2596 |  |  | nestor.epfl.ch, or by WWW from | 
| 2597 |  |  | "http://radsite.lbl.gov/radiance/HOME.html" | 
| 2598 |  |  | .FE | 
| 2599 | greg | 1.13 | The sixth translator, | 
| 2600 | greg | 1.1 | .I mgf2meta, | 
| 2601 |  |  | converts to a 2-dimensional line plot, and is also | 
| 2602 |  |  | distributed with Radiance. | 
| 2603 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2604 |  |  | Mgfilt is a simple but useful utility that takes MGF on its input | 
| 2605 |  |  | and produces MGF on its output. | 
| 2606 |  |  | It uses the parser to convert entities that are not wanted or | 
| 2607 |  |  | understood, and produces only the requested ones. | 
| 2608 |  |  | This is useful for seeing what exactly a program must understand | 
| 2609 |  |  | when it supports a given set of entities, and may serve as a | 
| 2610 |  |  | substitute for linking to the parser library for programmers who | 
| 2611 |  |  | wish to interpret the ASCII input directly but without all the | 
| 2612 |  |  | unwanted entities. | 
| 2613 |  |  | In future releases of MGF, this utility will also be handy for | 
| 2614 |  |  | taking new entities and producing older versions of MGF for | 
| 2615 |  |  | translators that have not yet been updated properly. | 
| 2616 | greg | 1.12 | .LP | 
| 2617 |  |  | Mgf2inv converts from MGF to Inventor or VRML format. | 
| 2618 |  |  | Some information is lost, because these formats do not support | 
| 2619 |  |  | physical light sources or materials. | 
| 2620 | greg | 1.13 | .LP | 
| 2621 |  |  | 3ds2mgf converts from 3D Studio binary format to MGF. | 
| 2622 |  |  | Care must be taken to correct for errors in the material descriptions, | 
| 2623 |  |  | since 3D Studio is completely non-physical. | 
| 2624 | greg | 1.1 | .ds LH Translators | 
| 2625 |  |  | .ds RH MGFILT | 
| 2626 |  |  | .bp | 
| 2627 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2628 |  |  | NAME | 
| 2629 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2630 |  |  | mgfilt - get usable MGF entities from input | 
| 2631 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2632 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 2633 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2634 |  |  | .B mgfilt | 
| 2635 |  |  | .B version | 
| 2636 |  |  | [ | 
| 2637 |  |  | .B input .. | 
| 2638 |  |  | ] | 
| 2639 |  |  | .br | 
| 2640 |  |  | or | 
| 2641 |  |  | .br | 
| 2642 |  |  | .B mgfilt | 
| 2643 |  |  | .B "e1,e2,.." | 
| 2644 |  |  | [ | 
| 2645 |  |  | .B input .. | 
| 2646 |  |  | ] | 
| 2647 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2648 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 2649 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2650 |  |  | .I Mgfilt | 
| 2651 |  |  | takes one or more MGF input files and converts all the entities to | 
| 2652 |  |  | the types listed. | 
| 2653 |  |  | In the first form, a single integer is given for the | 
| 2654 |  |  | .I version | 
| 2655 |  |  | of MGF that is to be produced. | 
| 2656 |  |  | Since MGF is in its first major release, this is not yet a useful | 
| 2657 |  |  | form, but it will be when the second major release comes out. | 
| 2658 | greg | 1.9 | This has the necessary side-effect of expanding all included files. | 
| 2659 |  |  | (See the | 
| 2660 |  |  | .UL i | 
| 2661 |  |  | entity.)\0 | 
| 2662 | greg | 1.1 | .LP | 
| 2663 |  |  | In the second form, | 
| 2664 |  |  | .I mgfilt | 
| 2665 |  |  | produces only the entities listed in the first argument, which must | 
| 2666 |  |  | be comma-separated. | 
| 2667 |  |  | The listed entity order is not important, but all entities given | 
| 2668 |  |  | must be defined in the current version of MGF. | 
| 2669 |  |  | Unknown entities will be summarily discarded on the input, and a | 
| 2670 |  |  | warning message will be printed to the standard error. | 
| 2671 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2672 |  |  | EXAMPLES | 
| 2673 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2674 |  |  | To take an MGF version 3 file and send it to a version 2 | 
| 2675 |  |  | translator: | 
| 2676 |  |  | .IP | 
| 2677 |  |  | mgfilt 2 input.mgf | mgf2rad > input.rad | 
| 2678 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2679 |  |  | To take an MGF file and produce only flat polygonal faces | 
| 2680 |  |  | with no materials: | 
| 2681 |  |  | .IP | 
| 2682 |  |  | mgfilt f,v,p,xf input.mgf > flatpoly.mgf | 
| 2683 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2684 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 2685 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2686 | greg | 1.12 | i, mgf2inv, mgf2rad, rad2mgf | 
| 2687 |  |  | .ds RH MGF2INV | 
| 2688 |  |  | .bp | 
| 2689 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2690 |  |  | NAME | 
| 2691 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2692 |  |  | mgf2inv - convert from MGF to Inventor or VRML format | 
| 2693 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2694 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 2695 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2696 |  |  | .B mgf2inv | 
| 2697 |  |  | [ | 
| 2698 |  |  | .B "-1|-2|-vrml" | 
| 2699 |  |  | ] | 
| 2700 |  |  | [ | 
| 2701 |  |  | .B input .. | 
| 2702 |  |  | ] | 
| 2703 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2704 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 2705 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2706 |  |  | .I Mgf2inv | 
| 2707 |  |  | takes one or more MGF input files and converts it to | 
| 2708 |  |  | Inventor or VRML format. | 
| 2709 |  |  | If the | 
| 2710 |  |  | .I \-1 | 
| 2711 |  |  | option is used, then Inventor 1.0 ASCII output is produced. | 
| 2712 |  |  | If the | 
| 2713 |  |  | .I \-2 | 
| 2714 |  |  | option is used, then Inventor 2.0 ASCII output is produced. | 
| 2715 |  |  | (This is the default.)\0 | 
| 2716 |  |  | If the | 
| 2717 |  |  | .I \-vrml | 
| 2718 |  |  | option is used, then VRML 1.0 ASCII output is produced. | 
| 2719 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2720 |  |  | This converter does not work properly for light sources, since | 
| 2721 |  |  | the output formats do not support IES-type luminaires with recorded | 
| 2722 |  |  | distributions. | 
| 2723 |  |  | Also, some material information may be lost because Inventor lacks | 
| 2724 |  |  | a physically valid reflectance model. | 
| 2725 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2726 |  |  | EXAMPLES | 
| 2727 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2728 |  |  | To take an MGF file and convert it to VRML format: | 
| 2729 |  |  | .IP | 
| 2730 |  |  | mgf2inv -vrml myscene.mgf > myscene.iv | 
| 2731 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2732 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 2733 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2734 | greg | 1.13 | mgf2rad(1), mgfilt(1), 3ds2mgf(1), rad2mgf(1) | 
| 2735 |  |  | .ds RH 3DS2MGF | 
| 2736 |  |  | .bp | 
| 2737 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2738 |  |  | NAME | 
| 2739 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2740 |  |  | 3ds2mgf - convert 3D Studio binary file to Materials and Geometry Format | 
| 2741 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2742 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 2743 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2744 |  |  | .B 3ds2mgf | 
| 2745 |  |  | .B input | 
| 2746 |  |  | [ | 
| 2747 |  |  | .B output | 
| 2748 |  |  | ] | 
| 2749 |  |  | [ | 
| 2750 |  |  | .B -lMatlib | 
| 2751 |  |  | ][ | 
| 2752 |  |  | .B -xObjname | 
| 2753 |  |  | ][ | 
| 2754 |  |  | .B -sAngle | 
| 2755 |  |  | ][ | 
| 2756 |  |  | .B -aAnimfile | 
| 2757 |  |  | ][ | 
| 2758 |  |  | .B -fN | 
| 2759 |  |  | ] | 
| 2760 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2761 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 2762 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2763 |  |  | .I 3ds2mgf | 
| 2764 |  |  | converts a 3D Studio binary scene description | 
| 2765 |  |  | to the Materials and Geometry Format (MGF). | 
| 2766 |  |  | If no output file name is given, the input root name | 
| 2767 |  |  | will be taken as the output root, and an "mgf" extension | 
| 2768 |  |  | will be added. | 
| 2769 |  |  | This file will contain any light sources and materials, and an include | 
| 2770 |  |  | statement for a similarly named file ending in "inc", which will contain | 
| 2771 |  |  | the MGF geometry of all the translated 3DS meshes. | 
| 2772 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2773 |  |  | The MGF material names and properties | 
| 2774 |  |  | for the surfaces will be those assigned in 3D Studio, | 
| 2775 |  |  | unless they are named in one or more MGF material libraries given in a | 
| 2776 |  |  | .I -l | 
| 2777 |  |  | option. | 
| 2778 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2779 |  |  | The | 
| 2780 |  |  | .I -x | 
| 2781 |  |  | option may be used to exclude a named object from the output. | 
| 2782 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2783 |  |  | The | 
| 2784 |  |  | .I -s | 
| 2785 |  |  | option may be used to adjust automatic mesh smoothing such that adjacent | 
| 2786 |  |  | triangle faces with less than the given angle between them (in degrees) | 
| 2787 |  |  | will be smoothed. | 
| 2788 |  |  | A value of zero turns smoothing off. | 
| 2789 |  |  | The default value is 60 degrees. | 
| 2790 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2791 |  |  | The | 
| 2792 |  |  | .I -a | 
| 2793 |  |  | option may be used to specify a 3D Studio animation file, and together with the | 
| 2794 |  |  | .I -f | 
| 2795 |  |  | option, | 
| 2796 |  |  | .I 3ds2mgf | 
| 2797 |  |  | will generate a scene description for the specified frame. | 
| 2798 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2799 |  |  | Note that there are no spaces between the options and their arguments. | 
| 2800 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2801 |  |  | LIMITATIONS | 
| 2802 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2803 |  |  | Obviously, since 3D Studio has no notion of physical materials, the | 
| 2804 |  |  | translation to MGF material descriptions is very ad hoc, and it will | 
| 2805 |  |  | usually be necessary to edit the materials and light sources in | 
| 2806 |  |  | the output file or replace materials with proper entries from a material | 
| 2807 |  |  | library using the | 
| 2808 |  |  | .I -l | 
| 2809 |  |  | option. | 
| 2810 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2811 |  |  | With smoothing turned on (i.e., a non-zero value for the | 
| 2812 |  |  | .I -s | 
| 2813 |  |  | option), vertices in the MGF output will not be linked in a proper | 
| 2814 |  |  | mesh for each object. | 
| 2815 |  |  | This is due to the way the automatic smoothing code was originally | 
| 2816 |  |  | written, and is too difficult to repair. | 
| 2817 |  |  | If a good mesh is needed, then smoothing must be turned off. | 
| 2818 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2819 |  |  | EXAMPLES | 
| 2820 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2821 |  |  | To convert a 3D Studio robot model to MGF without smoothing. | 
| 2822 |  |  | (Output will be put into "robot.mgf" and "robot.inc".) | 
| 2823 |  |  | .IP | 
| 2824 |  |  | 3ds2mgf robot.3ds -s0 | 
| 2825 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2826 |  |  | To convert a DC10 jet model to MGF using a hand-created material library: | 
| 2827 |  |  | .IP | 
| 2828 |  |  | 3ds2mgf dc10.3ds -ldc10mat.mgf | 
| 2829 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2830 |  |  | AUTHORS | 
| 2831 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2832 |  |  | Steve Anger, Jeff Bowermaster and Greg Ward | 
| 2833 |  |  | .br | 
| 2834 |  |  | Extended from 3ds2pov 1.8. | 
| 2835 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2836 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 2837 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2838 |  |  | mgf2inv(1), mgf2meta(1), mgf2rad(1) | 
| 2839 | greg | 1.1 | .ds RH MGF2RAD | 
| 2840 |  |  | .bp | 
| 2841 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2842 |  |  | NAME | 
| 2843 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2844 |  |  | mgf2rad - convert Materials and Geometry Format file to RADIANCE description | 
| 2845 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2846 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 2847 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2848 |  |  | .B mgf2rad | 
| 2849 |  |  | [ | 
| 2850 |  |  | .B "\-m matfile" | 
| 2851 |  |  | ][ | 
| 2852 |  |  | .B "\-e mult" | 
| 2853 |  |  | ][ | 
| 2854 |  |  | .B "\-g dist" | 
| 2855 |  |  | ] | 
| 2856 |  |  | [ | 
| 2857 |  |  | .B input .. | 
| 2858 |  |  | ] | 
| 2859 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2860 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 2861 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2862 |  |  | .I Mgf2rad | 
| 2863 |  |  | converts one or more Materials and Geometry Format (MGF) | 
| 2864 |  |  | files to a RADIANCE scene description. | 
| 2865 |  |  | By definition, all output dimensions are in meters. | 
| 2866 |  |  | The material names and properties | 
| 2867 |  |  | for the surfaces will be those assigned in MGF. | 
| 2868 |  |  | Any materials not defined in MGF will result in an error during | 
| 2869 |  |  | translation. | 
| 2870 |  |  | Light sources are described inline as IES luminaire files, and | 
| 2871 |  |  | .I mgf2rad | 
| 2872 |  |  | calls the program | 
| 2873 |  |  | .I ies2rad(1) | 
| 2874 |  |  | to translate these files. | 
| 2875 |  |  | If an IES file in turn contains an MGF description of the local | 
| 2876 |  |  | fixture geometry, this may result in a recursive call to | 
| 2877 |  |  | .I mgf2rad, | 
| 2878 |  |  | which is normal and should be transparent. | 
| 2879 |  |  | The only side-effect of this additional translation is the | 
| 2880 |  |  | appearance of other RADIANCE scene and data files produced | 
| 2881 |  |  | automatically by | 
| 2882 |  |  | .I ies2rad. | 
| 2883 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2884 |  |  | The | 
| 2885 |  |  | .I \-m | 
| 2886 |  |  | option may be used to put all the translated materials into a separate | 
| 2887 |  |  | RADIANCE file. | 
| 2888 |  |  | This is not always advisable, as any given material name may be | 
| 2889 |  |  | reused at different points in the MGF description, and writing them | 
| 2890 |  |  | to a separate file loses the contextual association between | 
| 2891 |  |  | materials and surfaces. | 
| 2892 |  |  | As long as unique material names are used throughout the MGF | 
| 2893 |  |  | description and material properties are not redefined, there | 
| 2894 |  |  | will be no problem. | 
| 2895 |  |  | Note that this is the only way to get all the translated materials | 
| 2896 |  |  | into a single file, since no output is produced for unreferenced | 
| 2897 |  |  | materials; i.e. translating just the MGF materials does not work. | 
| 2898 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2899 |  |  | The | 
| 2900 |  |  | .I \-e | 
| 2901 |  |  | option may be used to multiply all the emission values by the | 
| 2902 |  |  | given | 
| 2903 |  |  | .I mult | 
| 2904 |  |  | factor. | 
| 2905 |  |  | The | 
| 2906 |  |  | .I \-g | 
| 2907 |  |  | option may be used to establish a glow distance (in meters) | 
| 2908 |  |  | for all emitting surfaces. | 
| 2909 |  |  | These two options are employed principally by | 
| 2910 |  |  | .I ies2rad, | 
| 2911 |  |  | and are not generally useful to most users. | 
| 2912 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2913 |  |  | EXAMPLES | 
| 2914 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2915 |  |  | To translate two MGF files into one RADIANCE materials file and | 
| 2916 |  |  | one geometry file: | 
| 2917 |  |  | .IP | 
| 2918 |  |  | mgf2rad -m materials.rad building1.mgf building2.mgf > building1+2.rad | 
| 2919 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2920 |  |  | To create an octree directly from two MGF files and one RADIANCE | 
| 2921 |  |  | file: | 
| 2922 |  |  | .IP | 
| 2923 |  |  | oconv '\\!mgf2rad materials.mgf scene.mgf' source.rad > scene.oct | 
| 2924 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2925 |  |  | FILES | 
| 2926 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2927 |  |  | tmesh.cal       Used to smooth polygonal geometry | 
| 2928 |  |  | .br | 
| 2929 |  |  | *.rad           RADIANCE source descriptions created by ies2rad | 
| 2930 |  |  | .br | 
| 2931 |  |  | *.dat           RADIANCE source data created by ies2rad | 
| 2932 |  |  | .br | 
| 2933 |  |  | source.cal      Used for IES source coordinates | 
| 2934 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2935 |  |  | AUTHOR | 
| 2936 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2937 |  |  | Greg Ward | 
| 2938 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2939 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 2940 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2941 |  |  | ies2rad(1), mgf2meta(1), obj2rad(1), oconv(1), rad2mgf(1), xform(1) | 
| 2942 | greg | 1.3 | .ds RH RAD2MGF | 
| 2943 | greg | 1.1 | .bp | 
| 2944 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2945 |  |  | NAME | 
| 2946 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2947 |  |  | rad2mgf - convert RADIANCE scene description to Materials and Geometry Format | 
| 2948 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2949 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 2950 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2951 |  |  | .B rad2mgf | 
| 2952 |  |  | [ | 
| 2953 |  |  | .B \-dU | 
| 2954 |  |  | ] | 
| 2955 |  |  | [ | 
| 2956 |  |  | .B input .. | 
| 2957 |  |  | ] | 
| 2958 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2959 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 2960 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2961 |  |  | .I Rad2mgf | 
| 2962 |  |  | converts one or more RADIANCE scene files | 
| 2963 |  |  | to the Materials and Geometry Format (MGF). | 
| 2964 |  |  | Input units are specified with the | 
| 2965 |  |  | .I \-mU | 
| 2966 |  |  | option, where | 
| 2967 |  |  | .I U | 
| 2968 |  |  | is one of 'm' (meters), 'c' (centimeters), 'f' (feet) or 'i' | 
| 2969 |  |  | (inches). | 
| 2970 |  |  | The assumed unit is meters, which is the required output unit for | 
| 2971 |  |  | MGF (thus the need to know). | 
| 2972 |  |  | If the input dimensions are in none of these units, then the user | 
| 2973 |  |  | should apply | 
| 2974 |  |  | .I xform(1) | 
| 2975 |  |  | with the | 
| 2976 |  |  | .I \-s | 
| 2977 |  |  | option to bring the units into line prior to translation. | 
| 2978 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2979 |  |  | The MGF material names and properties | 
| 2980 |  |  | for the surfaces will be those assigned in RADIANCE. | 
| 2981 |  |  | If a referenced material has not been defined, then its name will | 
| 2982 |  |  | be invoked in the MGF output without definition, and the description | 
| 2983 |  |  | will be incomplete. | 
| 2984 |  |  | .SH | 
| 2985 |  |  | LIMITATIONS | 
| 2986 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2987 |  |  | Although MGF supports all of the geometric types and the most | 
| 2988 |  |  | common material types used in RADIANCE, there is currently no | 
| 2989 |  |  | support for advanced BRDF materials, patterns, textures or mixtures. | 
| 2990 |  |  | Also, the special types "source" and "antimatter" are not supported, | 
| 2991 |  |  | and all light source materials are converted to simple diffuse emitters | 
| 2992 |  |  | (except "illum" materials, which are converted to their alternates). | 
| 2993 |  |  | These primitives are reproduced as comments in the output and | 
| 2994 |  |  | must be replaced manually if necessary. | 
| 2995 |  |  | .LP | 
| 2996 |  |  | The RADIANCE "instance" type is treated specially. | 
| 2997 |  |  | .I Rad2mgf | 
| 2998 |  |  | converts each instance to an MGF include statement, using the corresponding | 
| 2999 |  |  | transformation and a file name derived from the octree name. | 
| 3000 |  |  | (The original octree suffix is replaced by ".mgf".)\0 | 
| 3001 |  |  | For this to work, the user must separately create the referenced | 
| 3002 |  |  | MGF files from the original RADIANCE descriptions. | 
| 3003 |  |  | The description file names can usually be determined using the | 
| 3004 |  |  | .I getinfo(1) | 
| 3005 |  |  | command run on the octrees in question. | 
| 3006 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3007 |  |  | EXAMPLES | 
| 3008 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3009 |  |  | To convert three RADIANCE files (in feet) to one MGF file: | 
| 3010 |  |  | .IP | 
| 3011 |  |  | mgf2rad -df file1.rad file2.rad file3.rad > scene.mgf | 
| 3012 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3013 |  |  | To translate a RADIANCE materials file to MGF: | 
| 3014 |  |  | .IP | 
| 3015 |  |  | mgf2rad materials.rad > materials.mgf | 
| 3016 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3017 |  |  | AUTHOR | 
| 3018 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3019 |  |  | Greg Ward | 
| 3020 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3021 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 3022 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3023 |  |  | getinfo(1), ies2rad(1), mgf2meta(1), mgf2rad(1), obj2rad(1), oconv(1), xform(1) | 
| 3024 |  |  | .ds RH MGF2META | 
| 3025 |  |  | .bp | 
| 3026 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3027 |  |  | NAME | 
| 3028 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3029 |  |  | mgf2meta - convert Materials and Geometry Format file to Metafile graphics | 
| 3030 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3031 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 3032 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3033 |  |  | .B mgf2meta | 
| 3034 |  |  | [ | 
| 3035 |  |  | .B "-t threshold" | 
| 3036 |  |  | ] | 
| 3037 |  |  | .B "{x|y|z} xmin xmax ymin ymax zmin zmax" | 
| 3038 |  |  | [ | 
| 3039 |  |  | .B input .. | 
| 3040 |  |  | ] | 
| 3041 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3042 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 3043 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3044 |  |  | .I Mgf2meta | 
| 3045 |  |  | converts one or more Materials and Geometry Format (MGF) | 
| 3046 |  |  | files to a 2-D orthographic projection along the selected axis in the | 
| 3047 |  |  | .I metafile(1) | 
| 3048 |  |  | graphics format. | 
| 3049 |  |  | All geometry is clipped to the specified bounding box, and the | 
| 3050 |  |  | resulting orientation is as follows: | 
| 3051 |  |  | .sp .5 | 
| 3052 |  |  | .nf | 
| 3053 |  |  | Projection      Orientation | 
| 3054 |  |  | ======= ======== | 
| 3055 |  |  | x               Y-axis right, Z-axis up | 
| 3056 |  |  | y               Z-axis right, X-axis up | 
| 3057 |  |  | z               X-axis right, Z-axis up | 
| 3058 |  |  | .fi | 
| 3059 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3060 |  |  | If multiple input files are given, the first file prints in black, | 
| 3061 |  |  | the second prints in red, the third in green and the fourth in blue. | 
| 3062 |  |  | If more than four input files are given, they cycle through the | 
| 3063 |  |  | colors again in three other line types:  dashed, dotted and | 
| 3064 |  |  | dot-dashed. | 
| 3065 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3066 |  |  | The | 
| 3067 |  |  | .I \-t | 
| 3068 |  |  | option may be used to randomly throw out line segments that are | 
| 3069 |  |  | shorter than the given | 
| 3070 |  |  | .I threshold | 
| 3071 |  |  | (given as a fraction of the plot width). | 
| 3072 |  |  | Segments are included with a | 
| 3073 |  |  | probability equal to the square of the line length over the square | 
| 3074 |  |  | of the threshold. | 
| 3075 |  |  | This can greatly reduce the number of lines in the drawing (and | 
| 3076 |  |  | therefore improve the drawing speed) with only a modest loss in | 
| 3077 |  |  | quality. | 
| 3078 |  |  | A typical value for this parameter is 0.005. | 
| 3079 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3080 |  |  | All MGF material information is ignored on the input. | 
| 3081 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3082 |  |  | EXAMPLES | 
| 3083 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3084 |  |  | To project two MGF files along the Z-axis and display them under | 
| 3085 |  |  | X11: | 
| 3086 |  |  | .IP | 
| 3087 |  |  | mgf2meta z 0 10 0 15 0 9 building1.mgf building2.mgf | x11meta | 
| 3088 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3089 |  |  | To convert a RADIANCE scene to a line drawing in RADIANCE picture | 
| 3090 |  |  | format: | 
| 3091 |  |  | .IP | 
| 3092 |  |  | rad2mgf scene.rad | mgf2meta x `getbbox -h scene.rad` | meta2tga | | 
| 3093 |  |  | ra_t8 -r > scene.pic | 
| 3094 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3095 |  |  | AUTHOR | 
| 3096 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3097 |  |  | Greg Ward | 
| 3098 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3099 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 3100 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3101 |  |  | getbbox(1), meta2tga(1), metafile(5), mgf2rad(1), pflip(1), | 
| 3102 |  |  | protate(1), psmeta(1), ra_t8(1), rad2mgf(1), t4014(1), x11meta(1) | 
| 3103 |  |  | .ds RH | 
| 3104 |  |  | .ds LH | 
| 3105 |  |  | .bp | 
| 3106 |  |  | .NH | 
| 3107 |  |  | MGF Parser Library | 
| 3108 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3109 |  |  | The principal motivation for creating a standard parser library for | 
| 3110 |  |  | MGF is to make it easy for software developers to offer some base | 
| 3111 |  |  | level of compliance. | 
| 3112 |  |  | The key to making MGF easy to support in fact is the parser, which | 
| 3113 |  |  | has the ability to express higher order entities in terms of | 
| 3114 |  |  | lower order ones. | 
| 3115 |  |  | For example, tori are part of the MGF specification, but if a given | 
| 3116 |  |  | program or translator does not support them, the parser will convert | 
| 3117 |  |  | them to cones. | 
| 3118 |  |  | If cones are not supported either, it will convert them further into | 
| 3119 |  |  | smoothed polygons. | 
| 3120 |  |  | If smoothing (vertex normal information) is not supported, it will | 
| 3121 |  |  | be ignored and the program will just get flat polygons. | 
| 3122 |  |  | This is done in such a way that future versions of the standard may | 
| 3123 |  |  | include new entities that old software does not even have to know | 
| 3124 |  |  | about, and they will be converted appropriately. | 
| 3125 |  |  | Forward compatibility is thus built right into the parser loading | 
| 3126 |  |  | mechanism itself -- the programmer simply links to the new code and | 
| 3127 |  |  | the new standard is supported without any further changes. | 
| 3128 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3129 |  |  | Language | 
| 3130 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3131 |  |  | The provided MGF parser is written in ANSI-C. | 
| 3132 |  |  | This language was chosen for reasons of portability and efficiency. | 
| 3133 |  |  | Almost all systems support some form of ANSI-compatible C, and many | 
| 3134 |  |  | languages can cross-link to C libraries without modification. | 
| 3135 |  |  | Backward compatibility to Kernighan and Ritchie C is achieved by | 
| 3136 |  |  | compiling with the -DNOPROTO flag. | 
| 3137 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3138 |  |  | All of the data structures and prototypes needed for the library | 
| 3139 |  |  | are in the header file "parser.h". | 
| 3140 |  |  | This file is the best resource for the parser and is updated with | 
| 3141 |  |  | each MGF release. | 
| 3142 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3143 |  |  | Mechanism | 
| 3144 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3145 |  |  | The parser works by a simple callback mechanism to routines that | 
| 3146 |  |  | actually interpret the individual entities. | 
| 3147 |  |  | Some of these routines will belong to the calling program, and some | 
| 3148 |  |  | will be entity support routines included in the library itself. | 
| 3149 |  |  | There is a global array of function pointers, called | 
| 3150 |  |  | .I mg_ehand. | 
| 3151 |  |  | It is defined thus: | 
| 3152 |  |  | .DS | 
| 3153 |  |  | extern int      (*mg_ehand[MG_NENTITIES])(int argc, char **argv); | 
| 3154 |  |  | .DE | 
| 3155 |  |  | Before parsing begins, this dispatch table is initialized to point to the | 
| 3156 |  |  | routines that will handle each supported entity. | 
| 3157 |  |  | Every entity handler has the same basic prototype, which is the | 
| 3158 |  |  | same as the | 
| 3159 |  |  | .I main | 
| 3160 |  |  | function, i.e: | 
| 3161 |  |  | .DS | 
| 3162 |  |  | extern int      \f2handler\f1(int argc, char **argv); | 
| 3163 |  |  | .DE | 
| 3164 |  |  | The first argument is the number of words in the MGF entity | 
| 3165 |  |  | (counting the entity itself) and the second argument is an array of | 
| 3166 |  |  | nul-terminated strings with the entity and its arguments. | 
| 3167 |  |  | The function should return zero or one of the error | 
| 3168 |  |  | codes defined in "parser.h". | 
| 3169 |  |  | A non-zero return value causes the parser to abort, returning the | 
| 3170 |  |  | error up through its call stack to the entry function, usually | 
| 3171 |  |  | .I mg_load. | 
| 3172 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3173 |  |  | A special function pointer for undefined entities is | 
| 3174 |  |  | defined as follows: | 
| 3175 |  |  | .DS | 
| 3176 |  |  | extern int      (*mg_uhand)(int argc, char **argv); | 
| 3177 |  |  | .DE | 
| 3178 |  |  | By default, this points to the library function | 
| 3179 |  |  | .I mg_defuhand, | 
| 3180 |  |  | which prints an error message on the first unknown entity and keeps a | 
| 3181 |  |  | count from then on, which is stored in the global unsigned integer | 
| 3182 |  |  | .I mg_nunknown. | 
| 3183 |  |  | If the | 
| 3184 |  |  | .I mg_uhand | 
| 3185 |  |  | pointer is assigned a value of NULL instead, parsing will abort at the | 
| 3186 |  |  | first unrecognized entity. | 
| 3187 |  |  | The reason this is not the default action is that ignoring unknown entities | 
| 3188 |  |  | offers a certain base level of forward compatibility. | 
| 3189 |  |  | Ignoring things one does not understand is not the best approach, but it | 
| 3190 |  |  | is usually better than quitting with an error message if the input is | 
| 3191 |  |  | in fact valid, but is a later version of the standard. | 
| 3192 |  |  | The real solution is to update the interpreter by linking to a new version | 
| 3193 |  |  | of the parser, or use a new version of the | 
| 3194 |  |  | .I mgfilt | 
| 3195 |  |  | command to convert the new MGF input to an older standard. | 
| 3196 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3197 |  |  | The | 
| 3198 |  |  | .I mg_uhand | 
| 3199 |  |  | pointer may also be used to customize the language for a particular | 
| 3200 |  |  | application by adding entities, though this is discouraged because it | 
| 3201 |  |  | tends to weaken the standard. | 
| 3202 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3203 |  |  | The skeletal framework for an MGF loader or translator is to assign | 
| 3204 |  |  | function pointers to the | 
| 3205 |  |  | .I mg_ehand | 
| 3206 |  |  | array, call the parser initialization function | 
| 3207 |  |  | .I mg_init, | 
| 3208 |  |  | then call the file loader function | 
| 3209 |  |  | .I mg_load | 
| 3210 |  |  | once for each input file. | 
| 3211 |  |  | This will in turn make calls back to the functions assigned to | 
| 3212 |  |  | .I mg_ehand. | 
| 3213 |  |  | To give a simple example, let us look at a | 
| 3214 |  |  | translator that understands only flat polygonal faces, putting out | 
| 3215 |  |  | vertex locations immediately after each "face" keyword: | 
| 3216 |  |  | .DS | 
| 3217 |  |  | #include <stdio.h> | 
| 3218 |  |  | #include "parser.h" | 
| 3219 |  |  |  | 
| 3220 |  |  | int | 
| 3221 |  |  | myfaceh(ac, av)                 /* face handling routine */ | 
| 3222 |  |  | int     ac; | 
| 3223 |  |  | char    **av; | 
| 3224 |  |  | { | 
| 3225 |  |  | C_VERTEX        *vp;    /* vertex structure pointer */ | 
| 3226 |  |  | FVECT   vert;           /* vertex point location */ | 
| 3227 |  |  | int     i; | 
| 3228 |  |  |  | 
| 3229 |  |  | if (ac < 4)                     /* check # arguments */ | 
| 3230 |  |  | return(MG_EARGC); | 
| 3231 | greg | 1.2 | printf("face\\\\n");            /* begin face output */ | 
| 3232 | greg | 1.1 | for (i = 1; i < ac; i++) { | 
| 3233 |  |  | if ((vp = c_getvert(av[i])) == NULL)    /* vertex from name */ | 
| 3234 |  |  | return(MG_EUNDEF); | 
| 3235 |  |  | xf_xfmpoint(vert, vp->p);                       /* apply transform */ | 
| 3236 | greg | 1.2 | printf("%15.9f %15.9f %15.9f\\\\n", | 
| 3237 | greg | 1.1 | vert[0], vert[1], vert[2]);                     /* output vertex */ | 
| 3238 |  |  | } | 
| 3239 | greg | 1.2 | printf(";\\\\n");                       /* end of face output */ | 
| 3240 | greg | 1.1 | return(MG_OK);                  /* normal exit */ | 
| 3241 |  |  | } | 
| 3242 |  |  |  | 
| 3243 |  |  | main(argc, argv)                /* translate MGF file(s) */ | 
| 3244 |  |  | int     argc; | 
| 3245 |  |  | char    **argv; | 
| 3246 |  |  | { | 
| 3247 |  |  | int     i; | 
| 3248 |  |  | /* initialize dispatch table */ | 
| 3249 |  |  | mg_ehand[MG_E_FACE] = myfaceh;          /* ours */ | 
| 3250 |  |  | mg_ehand[MG_E_VERTEX] = c_hvertex;              /* parser lib */ | 
| 3251 |  |  | mg_ehand[MG_E_POINT] = c_hvertex;               /* parser lib */ | 
| 3252 |  |  | mg_ehand[MG_E_XF] = xf_handler;         /* parser lib */ | 
| 3253 |  |  | mg_init();                              /* initialize parser */ | 
| 3254 |  |  | for (i = 1; i < argc; i++)              /* load each file argument */ | 
| 3255 |  |  | if (mg_load(argv[i]) != MG_OK)  /* and check for error */ | 
| 3256 |  |  | exit(1); | 
| 3257 |  |  | exit(0);                        /* all done! */ | 
| 3258 |  |  | } | 
| 3259 |  |  | .DE | 
| 3260 |  |  | Hopefully, this example demonstrates just how easy it is to | 
| 3261 |  |  | write an MGF translator. | 
| 3262 |  |  | Of course, translators get more complicated the more entity | 
| 3263 |  |  | types they support, but the point is that one does not | 
| 3264 |  |  | .I have | 
| 3265 |  |  | to support every entity -- the parser handles what the translator | 
| 3266 |  |  | does not. | 
| 3267 |  |  | Also, the library includes many general entity handlers, | 
| 3268 |  |  | further reducing the burden on the programmer. | 
| 3269 |  |  | This same principle means that it is not necessary to modify an | 
| 3270 |  |  | existing program to accommodate a new version of MGF -- one need only | 
| 3271 |  |  | link to the new parser library to comply with the new standard. | 
| 3272 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3273 |  |  | Division of Labor | 
| 3274 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3275 |  |  | As seen in the previous example, there are two parser routines that | 
| 3276 |  |  | are normally called directly in an MGF translator or loader program. | 
| 3277 |  |  | The first is | 
| 3278 |  |  | .I mg_init, | 
| 3279 |  |  | which takes no arguments but relies on the program having | 
| 3280 |  |  | initialized those parts of the global | 
| 3281 |  |  | .I mg_ehand | 
| 3282 |  |  | array it cares about. | 
| 3283 |  |  | The second routine is | 
| 3284 |  |  | .I mg_load, | 
| 3285 |  |  | which is called once on each input file. | 
| 3286 |  |  | (A third routine, | 
| 3287 |  |  | .I mg_clear, | 
| 3288 |  |  | may be called to free the parser data structures after each file or | 
| 3289 |  |  | after all files, if the program plans to continue rather than | 
| 3290 |  |  | exit.)\0 | 
| 3291 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3292 |  |  | The rest of the routines in a translator or loader program are | 
| 3293 |  |  | called indirectly through the | 
| 3294 |  |  | .I mg_ehand | 
| 3295 |  |  | dispatch table, and they are the ones that do the real work of | 
| 3296 |  |  | supporting the MGF entities. | 
| 3297 |  |  | In addition to converting or discarding entities that the calling | 
| 3298 |  |  | program does not know or care about, the parser library includes a | 
| 3299 |  |  | set of context handlers that greatly simplify the translation | 
| 3300 |  |  | process. | 
| 3301 |  |  | There are three handlers for each of the three named contexts and | 
| 3302 |  |  | their constituents, and two handlers for the two hierarchical | 
| 3303 |  |  | context entities. | 
| 3304 |  |  | To use these handlers, one simply sets the appropriate positions in the | 
| 3305 |  |  | .I mg_ehand | 
| 3306 |  |  | dispatch table to point to these functions. | 
| 3307 |  |  | Additional functions and global data structures provide convenient | 
| 3308 |  |  | access to the relevant contexts, and all of these are detailed in | 
| 3309 |  |  | the following manual pages. | 
| 3310 |  |  | .ds LH Basic Parser Routines | 
| 3311 |  |  | .ds RH MG_INIT | 
| 3312 |  |  | .bp | 
| 3313 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3314 |  |  | NAME | 
| 3315 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3316 |  |  | mg_init, mg_ehand, mg_uhand - initialize MGF entity handlers | 
| 3317 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3318 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 3319 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3320 |  |  | #include "parser.h" | 
| 3321 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3322 |  |  | .B void | 
| 3323 |  |  | mg_init( | 
| 3324 |  |  | .B void | 
| 3325 |  |  | ) | 
| 3326 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3327 |  |  | .B int | 
| 3328 |  |  | mg_defuhand( | 
| 3329 |  |  | .B int | 
| 3330 |  |  | argc, | 
| 3331 |  |  | .B char | 
| 3332 |  |  | **argv ) | 
| 3333 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3334 |  |  | .B "extern int" | 
| 3335 |  |  | (*mg_ehand[MG_NENTITIES])( | 
| 3336 |  |  | .B int | 
| 3337 |  |  | argc, | 
| 3338 |  |  | .B char | 
| 3339 |  |  | **argv ) | 
| 3340 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3341 |  |  | .B "extern int" | 
| 3342 |  |  | (*mg_uhand)( | 
| 3343 |  |  | .B int | 
| 3344 |  |  | argc, | 
| 3345 |  |  | .B char | 
| 3346 |  |  | **argv ) | 
| 3347 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3348 |  |  | .B "extern unsigned" | 
| 3349 |  |  | mg_nunknown | 
| 3350 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3351 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 3352 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3353 |  |  | The parser dispatch table, | 
| 3354 |  |  | .I mg_ehand | 
| 3355 |  |  | is initially set to all NULL pointers, and it | 
| 3356 |  |  | is the duty of the calling program to assign entity handler functions to | 
| 3357 |  |  | each of the supported entity positions in the array. | 
| 3358 |  |  | The entities are given in the include file "parser.h" as the | 
| 3359 |  |  | following: | 
| 3360 |  |  | .DS | 
| 3361 |  |  | #define MG_E_COMMENT    0               /* #            */ | 
| 3362 |  |  | #define MG_E_COLOR              1               /* c            */ | 
| 3363 |  |  | #define MG_E_CCT                2               /* cct          */ | 
| 3364 |  |  | #define MG_E_CONE               3               /* cone */ | 
| 3365 |  |  | #define MG_E_CMIX               4               /* cmix */ | 
| 3366 |  |  | #define MG_E_CSPEC              5               /* cspec        */ | 
| 3367 |  |  | #define MG_E_CXY                6               /* cxy          */ | 
| 3368 | greg | 1.4 | #define MG_E_CYL                7               /* cyl          */ | 
| 3369 | greg | 1.1 | #define MG_E_ED         8               /* ed           */ | 
| 3370 |  |  | #define MG_E_FACE               9               /* f            */ | 
| 3371 |  |  | #define MG_E_INCLUDE    10              /* i            */ | 
| 3372 |  |  | #define MG_E_IES                11              /* ies          */ | 
| 3373 | greg | 1.2 | #define MG_E_IR                 12              /* ir           */ | 
| 3374 | greg | 1.1 | #define MG_E_MATERIAL   13              /* m            */ | 
| 3375 |  |  | #define MG_E_NORMAL     14              /* n            */ | 
| 3376 |  |  | #define MG_E_OBJECT     15              /* o            */ | 
| 3377 |  |  | #define MG_E_POINT              16              /* p            */ | 
| 3378 |  |  | #define MG_E_PRISM              17              /* prism        */ | 
| 3379 |  |  | #define MG_E_RD         18              /* rd           */ | 
| 3380 |  |  | #define MG_E_RING               19              /* ring */ | 
| 3381 |  |  | #define MG_E_RS         20              /* rs           */ | 
| 3382 |  |  | #define MG_E_SIDES              21              /* sides        */ | 
| 3383 |  |  | #define MG_E_SPH                22              /* sph  */ | 
| 3384 |  |  | #define MG_E_TD         23              /* td           */ | 
| 3385 |  |  | #define MG_E_TORUS              24              /* torus        */ | 
| 3386 |  |  | #define MG_E_TS         25              /* ts           */ | 
| 3387 |  |  | #define MG_E_VERTEX     26              /* v            */ | 
| 3388 |  |  | #define MG_E_XF         27              /* xf           */ | 
| 3389 |  |  |  | 
| 3390 |  |  | #define MG_NENTITIES    28              /* total # entities */ | 
| 3391 |  |  | .DE | 
| 3392 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3393 |  |  | Once the | 
| 3394 |  |  | .I mg_ehand | 
| 3395 |  |  | array has been set by the program, the | 
| 3396 |  |  | .I mg_init | 
| 3397 |  |  | routine must be called to complete the initialization process. | 
| 3398 |  |  | This should be done once and only once per invocation, before any other | 
| 3399 |  |  | parser routines are called. | 
| 3400 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3401 |  |  | The | 
| 3402 |  |  | .I mg_uhand | 
| 3403 |  |  | variable points to the current handler for unknown entities | 
| 3404 |  |  | encountered on the input. | 
| 3405 |  |  | Its default value points to the | 
| 3406 |  |  | .I mg_defuhand | 
| 3407 |  |  | function, which simply increments the global variable | 
| 3408 |  |  | .I mg_nunknown, | 
| 3409 |  |  | printing a warning message on the standard error on the first | 
| 3410 |  |  | offense. | 
| 3411 |  |  | (This message may be avoided by incrementing | 
| 3412 |  |  | .I mg_nunknown | 
| 3413 |  |  | before processing begins.)\0 | 
| 3414 |  |  | If | 
| 3415 |  |  | .I mg_uhand | 
| 3416 |  |  | is assigned a value of NULL, then an unknown entity will return an | 
| 3417 |  |  | .I MG_EUNK | 
| 3418 |  |  | error, which will cause the parser to abort. | 
| 3419 |  |  | (See the | 
| 3420 |  |  | .I mg_load | 
| 3421 |  |  | page for a list of errors.)\0 | 
| 3422 |  |  | If the | 
| 3423 |  |  | .I mg_uhand | 
| 3424 |  |  | pointer is assigned to another function, that function will receive | 
| 3425 |  |  | any unknown entities and their arguments, and the parsing will | 
| 3426 |  |  | abort if the new function returns a non-zero error value. | 
| 3427 |  |  | This offers a convenient way to customize the language by adding | 
| 3428 |  |  | non-standard entities. | 
| 3429 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3430 |  |  | DIAGNOSTICS | 
| 3431 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3432 |  |  | If an inconsistent set of entities has been set for support, the | 
| 3433 |  |  | .I mg_init | 
| 3434 |  |  | routine will print an informative message to standard error and abort | 
| 3435 |  |  | the calling program with a call to | 
| 3436 |  |  | .I exit. | 
| 3437 |  |  | This is normally unacceptable behavior for a library routine, but since | 
| 3438 |  |  | such an error indicates a fault with the calling program itself, | 
| 3439 |  |  | recovery is impossible. | 
| 3440 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3441 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 3442 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3443 |  |  | mg_load, mg_handle | 
| 3444 |  |  | .ds RH MG_LOAD | 
| 3445 |  |  | .bp | 
| 3446 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3447 |  |  | NAME | 
| 3448 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3449 |  |  | mg_load, mg_clear, mg_file, mg_err - load MGF file, clear data structures | 
| 3450 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3451 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 3452 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3453 |  |  | #include "parser.h" | 
| 3454 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3455 |  |  | .B int | 
| 3456 |  |  | mg_load( | 
| 3457 |  |  | .B char | 
| 3458 |  |  | *filename ) | 
| 3459 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3460 |  |  | .B void | 
| 3461 |  |  | mg_clear( | 
| 3462 |  |  | .B void | 
| 3463 |  |  | ) | 
| 3464 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3465 |  |  | .B extern | 
| 3466 |  |  | MG_FCTXT *mg_file | 
| 3467 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3468 |  |  | .B "extern char" | 
| 3469 |  |  | *mg_err[MG_NERRS] | 
| 3470 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3471 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 3472 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3473 |  |  | The | 
| 3474 |  |  | .I mg_load | 
| 3475 |  |  | function loads the named file, or standard input if | 
| 3476 |  |  | .I filename | 
| 3477 |  |  | is the NULL pointer. | 
| 3478 |  |  | Calls back to the appropriate MGF handler routines are made through the | 
| 3479 |  |  | .I mg_ehand | 
| 3480 |  |  | dispatch table. | 
| 3481 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3482 |  |  | The global | 
| 3483 |  |  | .I mg_file | 
| 3484 |  |  | variable points to the current file context structure, which | 
| 3485 |  |  | may be useful for the interpretation of certain entities, such as | 
| 3486 |  |  | .UL ies, | 
| 3487 |  |  | which must know the directory path of the enclosing file. | 
| 3488 |  |  | This structure is of the defined type | 
| 3489 |  |  | .I MG_FCTXT, | 
| 3490 |  |  | given in "parser.h" as: | 
| 3491 |  |  | .DS | 
| 3492 |  |  | typedef struct mg_fctxt { | 
| 3493 |  |  | char    fname[96];                      /* file name */ | 
| 3494 |  |  | FILE    *fp;                            /* stream pointer */ | 
| 3495 |  |  | int     fid;                            /* unique file context id */ | 
| 3496 |  |  | char    inpline[4096];          /* input line */ | 
| 3497 |  |  | int     lineno;                 /* line number */ | 
| 3498 |  |  | struct mg_fctxt *prev;  /* previous context */ | 
| 3499 |  |  | } MG_FCTXT; | 
| 3500 |  |  | .DE | 
| 3501 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3502 |  |  | DIAGNOSTICS | 
| 3503 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3504 |  |  | If an error is encountered during parsing, | 
| 3505 |  |  | .I mg_load | 
| 3506 |  |  | will print an appropriate error message to the standard error stream | 
| 3507 |  |  | and return one of the non-zero values from "parser.h" listed below: | 
| 3508 |  |  | .DS | 
| 3509 |  |  | #define MG_OK                   0               /* normal return value */ | 
| 3510 |  |  | #define MG_EUNK         1               /* unknown entity */ | 
| 3511 |  |  | #define MG_EARGC                2               /* wrong number of arguments */ | 
| 3512 |  |  | #define MG_ETYPE                3               /* argument type error */ | 
| 3513 | greg | 1.14 | #define MG_EILL                 4               /* illegal argument value */ | 
| 3514 | greg | 1.1 | #define MG_EUNDEF               5               /* undefined reference */ | 
| 3515 |  |  | #define MG_ENOFILE              6               /* cannot open input file */ | 
| 3516 |  |  | #define MG_EINCL                7               /* error in included file */ | 
| 3517 |  |  | #define MG_EMEM         8               /* out of memory */ | 
| 3518 |  |  | #define MG_ESEEK                9               /* file seek error */ | 
| 3519 |  |  | #define MG_EBADMAT      10              /* bad material specification */ | 
| 3520 | greg | 1.8 | #define MG_ELINE                11              /* input line too long */ | 
| 3521 | greg | 1.10 | #define MG_ECNTXT               12              /* unmatched context close */ | 
| 3522 | greg | 1.1 |  | 
| 3523 | greg | 1.14 | #define MG_NERRS                13 | 
| 3524 | greg | 1.1 | .DE | 
| 3525 |  |  | If it is inappropriate to send output to standard error, the calling | 
| 3526 |  |  | program should use the routines listed under | 
| 3527 |  |  | .I mg_open | 
| 3528 |  |  | for better control over the parsing process. | 
| 3529 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3530 |  |  | The | 
| 3531 |  |  | .I mg_err | 
| 3532 |  |  | array contains error messages corresponding to each of the values | 
| 3533 |  |  | listed above in the native country's language. | 
| 3534 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3535 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 3536 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3537 | greg | 1.4 | mg_fgetpos, mg_handle, mg_init, mg_open | 
| 3538 | greg | 1.1 | .ds RH MG_OPEN | 
| 3539 |  |  | .bp | 
| 3540 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3541 |  |  | NAME | 
| 3542 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3543 |  |  | mg_open, mg_read, mg_parse, mg_close - MGF file loading subroutines | 
| 3544 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3545 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 3546 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3547 |  |  | #include "parser.h" | 
| 3548 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3549 |  |  | .B int | 
| 3550 |  |  | mg_open( MG_FCTXT *fcp, | 
| 3551 |  |  | .B char | 
| 3552 |  |  | *filename ) | 
| 3553 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3554 |  |  | .B int | 
| 3555 |  |  | mg_read( | 
| 3556 |  |  | .B void | 
| 3557 |  |  | ) | 
| 3558 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3559 |  |  | .B int | 
| 3560 |  |  | mg_parse( | 
| 3561 |  |  | .B void | 
| 3562 |  |  | ) | 
| 3563 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3564 |  |  | .B void | 
| 3565 |  |  | mg_close( | 
| 3566 |  |  | .B void | 
| 3567 |  |  | ) | 
| 3568 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3569 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 3570 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3571 |  |  | Most loaders and translators will call the | 
| 3572 |  |  | .I mg_load | 
| 3573 |  |  | routine to handle the above operations, but some programs or | 
| 3574 |  |  | entity handlers require tighter control over the loading process. | 
| 3575 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3576 |  |  | The | 
| 3577 |  |  | .I mg_open | 
| 3578 |  |  | routine takes an uninitialized | 
| 3579 |  |  | .I MG_FCTXT | 
| 3580 |  |  | structure and a file name as its arguments. | 
| 3581 |  |  | If | 
| 3582 |  |  | .I filename | 
| 3583 |  |  | is the NULL pointer, the standard input is "opened." | 
| 3584 |  |  | The | 
| 3585 |  |  | .I fcp | 
| 3586 |  |  | structure will be set by | 
| 3587 |  |  | .I mg_open | 
| 3588 |  |  | prior to its return, and the global | 
| 3589 |  |  | .I mg_file | 
| 3590 |  |  | pointer will be assigned to point to it. | 
| 3591 |  |  | This variable must not be destroyed until after the file is closed | 
| 3592 |  |  | with a call to | 
| 3593 |  |  | .I mg_close. | 
| 3594 |  |  | (See the | 
| 3595 |  |  | .I mg_load | 
| 3596 |  |  | page for a definition of | 
| 3597 |  |  | .I mg_file | 
| 3598 |  |  | and the | 
| 3599 |  |  | .I MG_FCTXT | 
| 3600 |  |  | type.)\0 | 
| 3601 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3602 |  |  | The | 
| 3603 |  |  | .I mg_read | 
| 3604 |  |  | function reads the next input line from the current file, | 
| 3605 |  |  | returning the number of characters in the line, or zero if the | 
| 3606 |  |  | end of file is reached or there is a file error. | 
| 3607 | greg | 1.11 | If the value returned equals MG_MAXLINE-1, | 
| 3608 | greg | 1.8 | then the input line was too long, and you | 
| 3609 |  |  | should return an MG_ELINE error. | 
| 3610 | greg | 1.11 | The function keeps track of the | 
| 3611 | greg | 1.1 | line number in the current file context | 
| 3612 |  |  | .I mg_file, | 
| 3613 |  |  | which also contains the line that was read. | 
| 3614 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3615 |  |  | The | 
| 3616 |  |  | .I mg_parse | 
| 3617 |  |  | function breaks the current line in the | 
| 3618 |  |  | .I mg_file | 
| 3619 |  |  | structure into words and calls the appropriate handler routine, if | 
| 3620 |  |  | any. | 
| 3621 |  |  | Blank lines and unsupported entities cause a quick return. | 
| 3622 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3623 |  |  | The | 
| 3624 |  |  | .I mg_close | 
| 3625 |  |  | routine closes the current input file (unless it is the standard | 
| 3626 |  |  | input) and returns to the previous file context (if any). | 
| 3627 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3628 |  |  | DIAGNOSTICS | 
| 3629 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3630 |  |  | The | 
| 3631 |  |  | .I mg_open | 
| 3632 |  |  | function returns | 
| 3633 |  |  | .I MG_OK | 
| 3634 |  |  | (0) normally, or | 
| 3635 |  |  | .I MG_ENOFILE | 
| 3636 |  |  | if the open fails for some reason. | 
| 3637 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3638 |  |  | The | 
| 3639 |  |  | .I mg_parse | 
| 3640 |  |  | function returns | 
| 3641 |  |  | .I MG_OK | 
| 3642 |  |  | if the current line was successfully interpreted, or one of the | 
| 3643 |  |  | defined error values if there is a problem. | 
| 3644 |  |  | (See the | 
| 3645 |  |  | .I mg_load | 
| 3646 |  |  | page for the defined error values.)\0 | 
| 3647 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3648 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 3649 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3650 |  |  | mg_fgetpos, mg_handle, mg_init, mg_load | 
| 3651 |  |  | .ds RH MG_FGETPOS | 
| 3652 |  |  | .bp | 
| 3653 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3654 |  |  | NAME | 
| 3655 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3656 |  |  | mg_fgetpos, mg_fgoto - get current file position and seek to pointer | 
| 3657 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3658 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 3659 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3660 |  |  | #include "parser.h" | 
| 3661 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3662 |  |  | .B void | 
| 3663 |  |  | mg_fgetpos( MG_FPOS *pos ) | 
| 3664 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3665 |  |  | .B int | 
| 3666 |  |  | mg_fgoto( MG_FPOS *pos ) | 
| 3667 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3668 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 3669 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3670 |  |  | The | 
| 3671 |  |  | .I mg_fgetpos | 
| 3672 |  |  | gets the current MGF file position and loads it into the passed | 
| 3673 |  |  | .I MG_FPOS | 
| 3674 |  |  | structure, | 
| 3675 |  |  | .I pos. | 
| 3676 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3677 |  |  | The | 
| 3678 |  |  | .I mg_fgoto | 
| 3679 |  |  | function seeks to the position | 
| 3680 |  |  | .I pos, | 
| 3681 |  |  | taken from a previous call to | 
| 3682 |  |  | .I mg_fgetpos. | 
| 3683 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3684 |  |  | DIAGNOSTICS | 
| 3685 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3686 |  |  | If | 
| 3687 |  |  | .I mg_fgoto | 
| 3688 |  |  | is passed an illegal pointer or one that does not correspond to the | 
| 3689 |  |  | current | 
| 3690 |  |  | .I mg_file | 
| 3691 |  |  | context, it will return the | 
| 3692 |  |  | .I MG_ESEEK | 
| 3693 |  |  | error value. | 
| 3694 |  |  | Normally, it returns | 
| 3695 |  |  | .I MG_OK | 
| 3696 |  |  | (0). | 
| 3697 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3698 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 3699 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3700 |  |  | mg_load, mg_open | 
| 3701 |  |  | .ds RH MG_HANDLE | 
| 3702 |  |  | .bp | 
| 3703 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3704 |  |  | NAME | 
| 3705 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3706 |  |  | mg_handle, mg_entity, mg_ename, mg_nqcdivs - entity assistance and control | 
| 3707 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3708 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 3709 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3710 |  |  | .B int | 
| 3711 |  |  | mg_handle( | 
| 3712 |  |  | .B int | 
| 3713 |  |  | en, | 
| 3714 |  |  | .B int | 
| 3715 |  |  | ac, | 
| 3716 |  |  | .B char | 
| 3717 |  |  | *av ) | 
| 3718 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3719 |  |  | .B int | 
| 3720 |  |  | mg_entity( | 
| 3721 |  |  | .B char | 
| 3722 |  |  | *name ) | 
| 3723 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3724 |  |  | .B "extern char" | 
| 3725 |  |  | mg_ename[MG_NENTITIES][MG_MAXELEN] | 
| 3726 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3727 |  |  | .B "extern int" | 
| 3728 |  |  | mg_nqcdivs | 
| 3729 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3730 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 3731 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3732 |  |  | The | 
| 3733 |  |  | .I mg_handle | 
| 3734 |  |  | routine may be used to pass entities back to the parser | 
| 3735 |  |  | to be redirected through the | 
| 3736 |  |  | .I mg_ehand | 
| 3737 |  |  | dispatch table. | 
| 3738 |  |  | This method is recommended rather than calling through | 
| 3739 |  |  | .I mg_ehand | 
| 3740 |  |  | directly, since the parser sometimes has its own support routines | 
| 3741 |  |  | that it needs to call for specific entities. | 
| 3742 |  |  | The first argument, | 
| 3743 |  |  | .I en, | 
| 3744 |  |  | is the corresponding entity number, or -1 if | 
| 3745 |  |  | .I mg_handle | 
| 3746 |  |  | should figure it out from the first | 
| 3747 |  |  | .I av | 
| 3748 |  |  | argument. | 
| 3749 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3750 |  |  | The | 
| 3751 |  |  | .I mg_entity | 
| 3752 |  |  | function gets an entity number from its name, using a hash | 
| 3753 |  |  | table on the | 
| 3754 |  |  | .I mg_ename | 
| 3755 |  |  | list. | 
| 3756 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3757 |  |  | The | 
| 3758 |  |  | .I mg_ename | 
| 3759 |  |  | table contains the string names corresponding to each MGF entity in | 
| 3760 |  |  | the designated order. | 
| 3761 |  |  | (See the | 
| 3762 |  |  | .I mg_init | 
| 3763 |  |  | page for the list of MGF entities.)\0 | 
| 3764 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3765 |  |  | The global integer variable | 
| 3766 |  |  | .I mg_nqcdivs | 
| 3767 |  |  | tells the parser how many subdivisions to use per quarter circle (90 | 
| 3768 |  |  | degrees) when tesselating curved geometry. | 
| 3769 |  |  | The default value is 5, and it may be reset at any time by the | 
| 3770 |  |  | calling program. | 
| 3771 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3772 |  |  | DIAGNOSTICS | 
| 3773 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3774 |  |  | The | 
| 3775 |  |  | .I mg_handle | 
| 3776 |  |  | function returns | 
| 3777 |  |  | .I MG_OK | 
| 3778 |  |  | if the entity is handled correctly, or one of the predefined error | 
| 3779 |  |  | values if there is a problem. | 
| 3780 |  |  | (See the | 
| 3781 |  |  | .I mg_load | 
| 3782 |  |  | page for a list of error values.)\0 | 
| 3783 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3784 |  |  | The | 
| 3785 |  |  | .I mg_entity | 
| 3786 |  |  | function returns -1 if the passed name does not appear in the | 
| 3787 |  |  | .I mg_ename | 
| 3788 |  |  | list. | 
| 3789 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3790 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 3791 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3792 |  |  | mg_init, mg_load, mg_open | 
| 3793 |  |  | .ds RH ISINT, ISFLT, ISNAME | 
| 3794 |  |  | .bp | 
| 3795 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3796 |  |  | NAME | 
| 3797 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3798 |  |  | isint, isflt, isname - determine if string fits integer or real format, | 
| 3799 |  |  | or is legal identifier | 
| 3800 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3801 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 3802 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3803 |  |  | .B int | 
| 3804 |  |  | isint( | 
| 3805 |  |  | .B char | 
| 3806 |  |  | *str ) | 
| 3807 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3808 |  |  | .B int | 
| 3809 |  |  | isflt( | 
| 3810 |  |  | .B char | 
| 3811 |  |  | *str ) | 
| 3812 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3813 |  |  | .B int | 
| 3814 |  |  | isname( | 
| 3815 |  |  | .B char | 
| 3816 |  |  | *str ) | 
| 3817 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3818 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 3819 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3820 |  |  | The | 
| 3821 |  |  | .I isint | 
| 3822 |  |  | function checks to see if the passed string | 
| 3823 |  |  | .I str | 
| 3824 |  |  | matches a decimal integer format (positive or negative), | 
| 3825 |  |  | and returns 1 or 0 based on whether it does or does not. | 
| 3826 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3827 |  |  | The | 
| 3828 |  |  | .I isflt | 
| 3829 |  |  | function checks to see if the passed string | 
| 3830 |  |  | .I str | 
| 3831 |  |  | matches a floating point format (positive or negative with optional | 
| 3832 |  |  | exponent), and returns 1 or 0 based on whether it does or does not. | 
| 3833 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3834 |  |  | The | 
| 3835 |  |  | .I isname | 
| 3836 |  |  | function checks to see if the passed string | 
| 3837 |  |  | .I str | 
| 3838 |  |  | is a legal identifier name. | 
| 3839 |  |  | In MGF, a legal identifier must begin with a letter and contain only | 
| 3840 |  |  | visible ASCII characters (those between decimal 33 and 127 inclusive). | 
| 3841 |  |  | The one caveat to this is that names may begin with one or more | 
| 3842 |  |  | underscores ('_'), but this is a trick employed by the parser to | 
| 3843 |  |  | maintain a separate name space from the user, and is not legal usage | 
| 3844 |  |  | otherwise. | 
| 3845 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3846 |  |  | Note that a string that matches an integer format is also a valid | 
| 3847 |  |  | floating point value. | 
| 3848 |  |  | Conversely, a string that is not a floating point number cannot be a | 
| 3849 |  |  | valid integer. | 
| 3850 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3851 |  |  | These routines are useful for checking arguments passed to entity | 
| 3852 |  |  | handlers that certain types in certain positions. | 
| 3853 |  |  | If an invalid argument is passed, the handler should return an | 
| 3854 |  |  | .I MG_ETYPE | 
| 3855 |  |  | error. | 
| 3856 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3857 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 3858 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3859 |  |  | mg_init, mg_load | 
| 3860 |  |  | .ds LH Entity Support Routines | 
| 3861 |  |  | .ds RH C_HVERTEX | 
| 3862 |  |  | .bp | 
| 3863 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3864 |  |  | NAME | 
| 3865 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3866 |  |  | c_hvertex, c_getvert, c_cvname, c_cvertex - vertex entity support | 
| 3867 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3868 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 3869 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3870 |  |  | #include "parser.h" | 
| 3871 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3872 |  |  | .B int | 
| 3873 |  |  | c_hvertex( | 
| 3874 |  |  | .B int | 
| 3875 |  |  | argc, | 
| 3876 |  |  | .B char | 
| 3877 |  |  | **argv ) | 
| 3878 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3879 |  |  | C_VERTEX *c_getvert( | 
| 3880 |  |  | .B char | 
| 3881 |  |  | *name ) | 
| 3882 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3883 |  |  | .B "extern char" | 
| 3884 |  |  | *c_vname | 
| 3885 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3886 |  |  | .B extern | 
| 3887 |  |  | C_VERTEX *c_cvertex | 
| 3888 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3889 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 3890 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3891 |  |  | The | 
| 3892 |  |  | .I c_hvertex | 
| 3893 |  |  | function handles the MGF vertex entities, | 
| 3894 |  |  | .UL v, | 
| 3895 |  |  | .UL p | 
| 3896 |  |  | and | 
| 3897 |  |  | .UL n. | 
| 3898 |  |  | If either | 
| 3899 |  |  | .UL p | 
| 3900 |  |  | or | 
| 3901 |  |  | .UL n | 
| 3902 |  |  | is supported, then | 
| 3903 |  |  | .UL v | 
| 3904 |  |  | must be also. | 
| 3905 |  |  | The assignments are normally made to the | 
| 3906 |  |  | .I mg_ehand | 
| 3907 |  |  | array prior to parser initialization, like so: | 
| 3908 |  |  | .DS | 
| 3909 |  |  | mg_ehand[MG_E_VERTEX] = c_hvertex;              /* support "v" entity */ | 
| 3910 |  |  | mg_ehand[MG_E_POINT] = c_hvertex;               /* support "p" entity */ | 
| 3911 |  |  | mg_ehand[MG_E_NORMAL] = c_hvertex;      /* support "n" entity */ | 
| 3912 |  |  | /* other entity handler assignments... */ | 
| 3913 |  |  | mg_init();                      /* initialize parser */ | 
| 3914 |  |  | .DE | 
| 3915 |  |  | If vertex normals are not understood by any of the program-supported | 
| 3916 |  |  | entities, then the | 
| 3917 |  |  | .I MG_E_NORMAL | 
| 3918 |  |  | entry may be left with its original NULL assignment. | 
| 3919 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3920 |  |  | The | 
| 3921 |  |  | .I c_getvert | 
| 3922 |  |  | call takes the name of a defined vertex and returns a pointer to its | 
| 3923 |  |  | .I C_VERTEX | 
| 3924 |  |  | structure, defined in "parser.h" as: | 
| 3925 |  |  | .DS | 
| 3926 |  |  | typedef FLOAT  FVECT[3];        /* a 3-d real vector */ | 
| 3927 |  |  |  | 
| 3928 |  |  | typedef struct { | 
| 3929 |  |  | int     clock;                  /* incremented each change -- resettable */ | 
| 3930 | gregl | 1.19 | char    *client_data;   /* pointer to private client data */ | 
| 3931 | greg | 1.1 | FVECT   p, n;           /* point and normal */ | 
| 3932 |  |  | } C_VERTEX;             /* vertex context */ | 
| 3933 |  |  | .DE | 
| 3934 |  |  | The | 
| 3935 |  |  | .I clock | 
| 3936 |  |  | member will be incremented each time the value gets changed by a | 
| 3937 |  |  | .UL p | 
| 3938 |  |  | or | 
| 3939 |  |  | .UL n | 
| 3940 |  |  | entity, and may be reset by the controlling program if desired. | 
| 3941 |  |  | This is a convenient way to keep track of whether or not a vertex has | 
| 3942 |  |  | changed since its last use. | 
| 3943 |  |  | To link identical vertices, one must also check that the current | 
| 3944 |  |  | transform has not changed, which is uniquely identified by the | 
| 3945 |  |  | global | 
| 3946 |  |  | .I xf_context->xid | 
| 3947 | greg | 1.14 | variable, but only if one is using the parser library's transform | 
| 3948 | greg | 1.1 | handler. | 
| 3949 |  |  | (See the | 
| 3950 |  |  | .I xf_handler | 
| 3951 |  |  | page.)\0 | 
| 3952 | gregl | 1.19 | The | 
| 3953 |  |  | .I client_data | 
| 3954 |  |  | pointer may be used to index private application data for vertex | 
| 3955 |  |  | linking, etc. | 
| 3956 |  |  | This pointer is initialized to NULL when the context is created, | 
| 3957 |  |  | and otherwise ignored by the parser library. | 
| 3958 | greg | 1.1 | .LP | 
| 3959 | gregl | 1.19 | It is possible but not recommended to alter the shared contents of the | 
| 3960 | greg | 1.1 | vertex structure returned by | 
| 3961 |  |  | .I c_getvert. | 
| 3962 |  |  | Normally it is read during the | 
| 3963 |  |  | interpretation of entities using named vertices. | 
| 3964 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3965 |  |  | The name of the current vertex is given by the global | 
| 3966 |  |  | .I c_cvname | 
| 3967 |  |  | variable, which is set to NULL if the unnamed vertex is current. | 
| 3968 |  |  | The current vertex value is pointed to by the global variable | 
| 3969 |  |  | .I c_cvertex, | 
| 3970 |  |  | which should never be NULL. | 
| 3971 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3972 |  |  | DIAGNOSTICS | 
| 3973 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3974 |  |  | The | 
| 3975 |  |  | .I c_hvertex | 
| 3976 |  |  | function returns | 
| 3977 |  |  | .I MG_OK | 
| 3978 |  |  | (0) if the vertex is handled correctly, or one of the predefined | 
| 3979 |  |  | error values if there is a problem. | 
| 3980 |  |  | (See the | 
| 3981 |  |  | .I mg_load | 
| 3982 |  |  | page for a list of errors.)\0 | 
| 3983 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3984 |  |  | The | 
| 3985 |  |  | .I c_getvert | 
| 3986 |  |  | function returns NULL if the specified vertex name is undefined, at | 
| 3987 |  |  | which point the calling function should return an | 
| 3988 |  |  | .I MG_EUNDEF | 
| 3989 |  |  | error. | 
| 3990 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3991 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 3992 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3993 |  |  | c_hcolor, c_hmaterial, mg_init, mg_load, xf_handler | 
| 3994 |  |  | .ds RH C_HCOLOR | 
| 3995 |  |  | .bp | 
| 3996 |  |  | .SH | 
| 3997 |  |  | NAME | 
| 3998 |  |  | .LP | 
| 3999 |  |  | c_hcolor, c_getcolor, c_ccname, c_ccolor, c_ccvt, c_isgrey - | 
| 4000 |  |  | color entity support | 
| 4001 |  |  | .SH | 
| 4002 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 4003 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4004 |  |  | #include "parser.h" | 
| 4005 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4006 |  |  | .B int | 
| 4007 |  |  | c_hcolor( | 
| 4008 |  |  | .B int | 
| 4009 |  |  | argc, | 
| 4010 |  |  | .B char | 
| 4011 |  |  | **argv ) | 
| 4012 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4013 |  |  | C_COLOR *c_getcolor( | 
| 4014 |  |  | .B char | 
| 4015 |  |  | *name ) | 
| 4016 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4017 |  |  | .B "extern char" | 
| 4018 |  |  | *c_ccname | 
| 4019 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4020 |  |  | .B extern | 
| 4021 |  |  | C_COLOR *c_ccolor | 
| 4022 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4023 |  |  | .B void | 
| 4024 |  |  | c_ccvt( C_COLOR *cvp, | 
| 4025 |  |  | .B int | 
| 4026 |  |  | cflags ) | 
| 4027 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4028 |  |  | .B int | 
| 4029 |  |  | c_isgrey( C_COLOR *cvp ) | 
| 4030 |  |  | .SH | 
| 4031 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 4032 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4033 |  |  | The | 
| 4034 |  |  | .I c_hcolor | 
| 4035 |  |  | function supports the MGF entities, | 
| 4036 |  |  | .UL c, | 
| 4037 |  |  | .UL cxy, | 
| 4038 |  |  | .UL cspec, | 
| 4039 |  |  | .UL cct | 
| 4040 |  |  | and | 
| 4041 |  |  | .UL cmix. | 
| 4042 |  |  | It is an error to support any of the color field entities without | 
| 4043 |  |  | supporting the | 
| 4044 |  |  | .UL c | 
| 4045 |  |  | entity itself. | 
| 4046 |  |  | The assignments are normally made to the | 
| 4047 |  |  | .I mg_ehand | 
| 4048 |  |  | array prior to parser initialization, like so: | 
| 4049 |  |  | .DS | 
| 4050 |  |  | mg_ehand[MG_E_COLOR] = c_hcolor;        /* support "c" entity */ | 
| 4051 |  |  | mg_ehand[MG_E_CXY] = c_hcolor;  /* support "cxy" entity */ | 
| 4052 |  |  | mg_ehand[MG_E_CSPEC] = c_hcolor;        /* support "cspec" entity */ | 
| 4053 |  |  | mg_ehand[MG_E_CCT] = c_hcolor;          /* support "cct" entity */ | 
| 4054 |  |  | mg_ehand[MG_E_CMIX] = c_hcolor; /* support "cmix" entity */ | 
| 4055 |  |  | /* other entity handler assignments... */ | 
| 4056 |  |  | mg_init();                      /* initialize parser */ | 
| 4057 |  |  | .DE | 
| 4058 |  |  | If the loader/translator has no use for spectral data, the entries for | 
| 4059 |  |  | .UL cspec | 
| 4060 |  |  | and | 
| 4061 |  |  | .UL cct | 
| 4062 |  |  | may be left with their original NULL assignments and these entities will | 
| 4063 |  |  | be re-expressed appropriately as tristimulus values. | 
| 4064 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4065 |  |  | The | 
| 4066 |  |  | .I c_getcolor | 
| 4067 |  |  | function takes the name of a defined color and returns a pointer to its | 
| 4068 |  |  | .I C_COLOR | 
| 4069 |  |  | structure, defined in "parser.h" as: | 
| 4070 |  |  | .DS | 
| 4071 |  |  | #define C_CMINWL        380                                     /* minimum wavelength */ | 
| 4072 |  |  | #define C_CMAXWL        780                                     /* maximum wavelength */ | 
| 4073 |  |  | #define C_CNSS          41                                      /* number of spectral samples */ | 
| 4074 |  |  | #define C_CWLI          ((C_CMAXWL-C_CMINWL)/(C_CNSS-1)) | 
| 4075 |  |  | #define C_CMAXV         10000                   /* nominal maximum sample value */ | 
| 4076 |  |  | #define C_CLPWM         (683./C_CMAXV)  /* peak lumens/watt multiplier */ | 
| 4077 |  |  |  | 
| 4078 |  |  | typedef struct { | 
| 4079 |  |  | int     clock;                  /* incremented each change */ | 
| 4080 | gregl | 1.19 | char    *client_data;   /* pointer to private client data */ | 
| 4081 | greg | 1.1 | short   flags;                  /* what's been set */ | 
| 4082 |  |  | short   ssamp[C_CNSS];  /* spectral samples, min wl to max */ | 
| 4083 |  |  | long    ssum;                   /* straight sum of spectral values */ | 
| 4084 |  |  | float   cx, cy;         /* xy chromaticity value */ | 
| 4085 |  |  | float   eff;                    /* efficacy (lumens/watt) */ | 
| 4086 |  |  | } C_COLOR;              /* color context */ | 
| 4087 |  |  | .DE | 
| 4088 |  |  | The | 
| 4089 |  |  | .I clock | 
| 4090 |  |  | member will be incremented each time the value gets changed by a | 
| 4091 |  |  | color field entity, and may be reset by the calling program if | 
| 4092 |  |  | desired. | 
| 4093 |  |  | This is a convenient way to keep track of whether or not a color has | 
| 4094 |  |  | changed since its last use. | 
| 4095 |  |  | The | 
| 4096 | gregl | 1.19 | .I client_data | 
| 4097 |  |  | pointer may be used to index private application data. | 
| 4098 |  |  | This pointer is initialized to NULL when the context is created, | 
| 4099 |  |  | and otherwise ignored by the parser library. | 
| 4100 |  |  | The | 
| 4101 | greg | 1.1 | .I flags | 
| 4102 |  |  | member indicates which color representations have been assigned, | 
| 4103 |  |  | and is an inclusive OR of one or more of the following: | 
| 4104 |  |  | .DS | 
| 4105 |  |  | #define C_CSSPEC        01              /* flag if spectrum is set */ | 
| 4106 |  |  | #define C_CDSPEC        02              /* flag if defined w/ spectrum */ | 
| 4107 |  |  | #define C_CSXY          04              /* flag if xy is set */ | 
| 4108 |  |  | #define C_CDXY          010             /* flag if defined w/ xy */ | 
| 4109 |  |  | #define C_CSEFF         020             /* flag if efficacy set */ | 
| 4110 |  |  | .DE | 
| 4111 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4112 |  |  | It is possible but not recommended to alter the contents of the | 
| 4113 |  |  | color structure returned by | 
| 4114 |  |  | .I c_getcolor. | 
| 4115 |  |  | Normally, this routine is never called directly, since there are no | 
| 4116 |  |  | entities that access colors by name other than | 
| 4117 |  |  | .UL c. | 
| 4118 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4119 |  |  | The global variable | 
| 4120 |  |  | .I c_ccname | 
| 4121 |  |  | points to the name of the current color, or NULL if it is unnamed. | 
| 4122 |  |  | The variable | 
| 4123 |  |  | .I c_ccolor | 
| 4124 |  |  | points to the current color value, which should never be NULL. | 
| 4125 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4126 |  |  | The | 
| 4127 |  |  | .I c_ccvt | 
| 4128 |  |  | routine takes a | 
| 4129 |  |  | .I C_COLOR | 
| 4130 |  |  | structure and a set of desired flag settings and computes the | 
| 4131 |  |  | missing color representation(s). | 
| 4132 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4133 |  |  | The | 
| 4134 |  |  | .I c_isgrey | 
| 4135 |  |  | function returns 1 if the passed color is very close to neutral | 
| 4136 |  |  | grey, or 0 otherwise. | 
| 4137 |  |  | .SH | 
| 4138 |  |  | DIAGNOSTICS | 
| 4139 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4140 |  |  | The | 
| 4141 |  |  | .I c_hcolor | 
| 4142 |  |  | function returns | 
| 4143 |  |  | .I MG_OK | 
| 4144 |  |  | (0) if the color is handled correctly, or one of the predefined | 
| 4145 |  |  | error values if there is a problem. | 
| 4146 |  |  | (See the | 
| 4147 |  |  | .I mg_load | 
| 4148 |  |  | page for a list of errors.)\0 | 
| 4149 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4150 |  |  | The | 
| 4151 |  |  | .I c_getcolor | 
| 4152 |  |  | function returns NULL if the specified color name is undefined, at | 
| 4153 |  |  | which point the calling function should return an | 
| 4154 |  |  | .I MG_EUNDEF | 
| 4155 |  |  | error. | 
| 4156 |  |  | .SH | 
| 4157 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 4158 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4159 |  |  | c_hmaterial, c_hvertex, mg_init, mg_load | 
| 4160 |  |  | .ds RH C_HMATERIAL | 
| 4161 |  |  | .bp | 
| 4162 |  |  | .SH | 
| 4163 |  |  | NAME | 
| 4164 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4165 |  |  | c_hmaterial, c_getmaterial, c_cmname, c_cmaterial - | 
| 4166 |  |  | material entity support | 
| 4167 |  |  | .SH | 
| 4168 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 4169 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4170 |  |  | #include "parser.h" | 
| 4171 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4172 |  |  | .B int | 
| 4173 |  |  | c_hmaterial( | 
| 4174 |  |  | .B int | 
| 4175 |  |  | argc, | 
| 4176 |  |  | .B char | 
| 4177 |  |  | **argv ) | 
| 4178 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4179 |  |  | C_MATERIAL *c_getmaterial( | 
| 4180 |  |  | .B char | 
| 4181 |  |  | *name ) | 
| 4182 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4183 |  |  | .B "extern char" | 
| 4184 |  |  | *c_cmname | 
| 4185 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4186 |  |  | .B extern | 
| 4187 |  |  | C_MATERIAL *c_cmaterial | 
| 4188 |  |  | .SH | 
| 4189 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 4190 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4191 |  |  | The | 
| 4192 |  |  | .I c_hmaterial | 
| 4193 |  |  | function supports the MGF entities, | 
| 4194 |  |  | .UL m, | 
| 4195 |  |  | .UL ed, | 
| 4196 |  |  | .UL ir, | 
| 4197 |  |  | .UL rd, | 
| 4198 |  |  | .UL rs, | 
| 4199 |  |  | .UL sides, | 
| 4200 |  |  | .UL td, | 
| 4201 |  |  | and | 
| 4202 |  |  | .UL ts. | 
| 4203 |  |  | It is an error to support any of the material field entities without | 
| 4204 |  |  | supporting the | 
| 4205 |  |  | .UL m | 
| 4206 |  |  | entity itself. | 
| 4207 |  |  | The assignments are normally made to the | 
| 4208 |  |  | .I mg_ehand | 
| 4209 |  |  | array prior to parser initialization, like so: | 
| 4210 |  |  | .DS | 
| 4211 |  |  | mg_ehand[MG_E_MATERIAL] = c_hmaterial;  /* support "m" entity */ | 
| 4212 |  |  | mg_ehand[MG_E_ED] = c_hmaterial;                /* support "ed" entity */ | 
| 4213 |  |  | mg_ehand[MG_E_IR] = c_hmaterial;                /* support "ir" entity */ | 
| 4214 |  |  | mg_ehand[MG_E_RD] = c_hmaterial;                /* support "rd" entity */ | 
| 4215 |  |  | mg_ehand[MG_E_RS] = c_hmaterial;                /* support "rs" entity */ | 
| 4216 |  |  | mg_ehand[MG_E_SIDES] = c_hmaterial;             /* support "sides" entity */ | 
| 4217 |  |  | mg_ehand[MG_E_TD] = c_hmaterial;                /* support "td" entity */ | 
| 4218 |  |  | mg_ehand[MG_E_TS] = c_hmaterial;                /* support "ts" entity */ | 
| 4219 |  |  | /* other entity handler assignments... */ | 
| 4220 |  |  | mg_init();                      /* initialize parser */ | 
| 4221 |  |  | .DE | 
| 4222 |  |  | Any of the above entities besides | 
| 4223 |  |  | .UL m | 
| 4224 |  |  | may be unsupported, but the parser will not attempt to include their | 
| 4225 |  |  | effect into other members, e.g. an unsupported | 
| 4226 |  |  | .UL rs | 
| 4227 |  |  | component will not be added back into the | 
| 4228 |  |  | .UL rd | 
| 4229 |  |  | member. | 
| 4230 |  |  | It is therefore safer to support all of the relevant material | 
| 4231 |  |  | entities and make final approximations from the complete | 
| 4232 |  |  | .I C_MATERIAL | 
| 4233 |  |  | structure. | 
| 4234 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4235 |  |  | The | 
| 4236 |  |  | .I c_getmaterial | 
| 4237 |  |  | function takes the name of a defined material and returns a pointer to its | 
| 4238 |  |  | .I C_MATERIAL | 
| 4239 |  |  | structure, defined in "parser.h" as: | 
| 4240 |  |  | .DS | 
| 4241 |  |  | #define C_1SIDEDTHICK   0.005           /* assumed thickness of 1-sided mat. */ | 
| 4242 |  |  |  | 
| 4243 |  |  | typedef struct { | 
| 4244 |  |  | int     clock;          /* incremented each change -- resettable */ | 
| 4245 | gregl | 1.19 | char    *client_data;   /* pointer to private client data */ | 
| 4246 | greg | 1.1 | int     sided;          /* 1 if surface is 1-sided, 0 for 2-sided */ | 
| 4247 |  |  | float   nr, ni;         /* index of refraction, real and imaginary */ | 
| 4248 |  |  | float   rd;             /* diffuse reflectance */ | 
| 4249 |  |  | C_COLOR rd_c;   /* diffuse reflectance color */ | 
| 4250 |  |  | float   td;             /* diffuse transmittance */ | 
| 4251 |  |  | C_COLOR td_c;   /* diffuse transmittance color */ | 
| 4252 |  |  | float   ed;             /* diffuse emittance */ | 
| 4253 |  |  | C_COLOR ed_c;   /* diffuse emittance color */ | 
| 4254 |  |  | float   rs;             /* specular reflectance */ | 
| 4255 |  |  | C_COLOR rs_c;   /* specular reflectance color */ | 
| 4256 |  |  | float   rs_a;           /* specular reflectance roughness */ | 
| 4257 |  |  | float   ts;             /* specular transmittance */ | 
| 4258 |  |  | C_COLOR ts_c;   /* specular transmittance color */ | 
| 4259 |  |  | float   ts_a;           /* specular transmittance roughness */ | 
| 4260 |  |  | } C_MATERIAL;   /* material context */ | 
| 4261 |  |  | .DE | 
| 4262 |  |  | The | 
| 4263 |  |  | .I clock | 
| 4264 |  |  | member will be incremented each time the value gets changed by a | 
| 4265 |  |  | material field entity, and may be reset by the calling program if | 
| 4266 |  |  | desired. | 
| 4267 |  |  | This is a convenient way to keep track of whether or not a material has | 
| 4268 |  |  | changed since its last use. | 
| 4269 | gregl | 1.19 | The | 
| 4270 |  |  | .I client_data | 
| 4271 |  |  | pointer may be used to index private application data. | 
| 4272 |  |  | This pointer is initialized to NULL when the context is created, | 
| 4273 |  |  | and otherwise ignored by the parser library. | 
| 4274 | greg | 1.1 | .LP | 
| 4275 |  |  | All reflectance and transmittance values correspond to normal | 
| 4276 |  |  | incidence, and may vary as a function of angle depending on the | 
| 4277 |  |  | index of refraction. | 
| 4278 |  |  | A solid object is normally represented with a one-sided material. | 
| 4279 |  |  | A two-sided material is most appropriate for thin surfaces, though | 
| 4280 |  |  | it may be used also when the surface normal orientations in a model | 
| 4281 |  |  | are unreliable. | 
| 4282 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4283 |  |  | If a transparent or translucent surface is one-sided, then the | 
| 4284 |  |  | absorption will change as a function of distance through the | 
| 4285 |  |  | material, and a single value for diffuse or specular transmittance is | 
| 4286 |  |  | ambiguous. | 
| 4287 |  |  | We therefore define a standard thickness, | 
| 4288 |  |  | .I C_1SIDEDTHICK, | 
| 4289 |  |  | which is the object thickness to which the given values correspond, | 
| 4290 |  |  | so that one may compute the isotropic absorptance of the material. | 
| 4291 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4292 |  |  | It is possible but not recommended to alter the contents of the | 
| 4293 |  |  | material structure returned by | 
| 4294 |  |  | .I c_getmaterial. | 
| 4295 |  |  | Normally, this routine is never called directly, since there are no | 
| 4296 |  |  | entities that access materials by name other than | 
| 4297 |  |  | .UL m. | 
| 4298 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4299 |  |  | The global variable | 
| 4300 |  |  | .I c_cmname | 
| 4301 |  |  | points to the name of the current material, or NULL if it is unnamed. | 
| 4302 |  |  | The variable | 
| 4303 |  |  | .I c_cmaterial | 
| 4304 |  |  | points to the current material value, which should never be NULL. | 
| 4305 |  |  | .SH | 
| 4306 |  |  | DIAGNOSTICS | 
| 4307 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4308 |  |  | The | 
| 4309 |  |  | .I c_hmaterial | 
| 4310 |  |  | function returns | 
| 4311 |  |  | .I MG_OK | 
| 4312 |  |  | (0) if the color is handled correctly, or one of the predefined | 
| 4313 |  |  | error values if there is a problem. | 
| 4314 |  |  | (See the | 
| 4315 |  |  | .I mg_load | 
| 4316 |  |  | page for a list of errors.)\0 | 
| 4317 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4318 |  |  | The | 
| 4319 |  |  | .I c_getmaterial | 
| 4320 |  |  | function returns NULL if the specified material name is undefined, at | 
| 4321 |  |  | which point the calling function should return an | 
| 4322 |  |  | .I MG_EUNDEF | 
| 4323 |  |  | error. | 
| 4324 |  |  | .SH | 
| 4325 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 4326 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4327 |  |  | c_hcolor, c_hvertex, mg_init, mg_load | 
| 4328 |  |  | .ds RH OBJ_HANDLER | 
| 4329 |  |  | .bp | 
| 4330 |  |  | .SH | 
| 4331 |  |  | NAME | 
| 4332 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4333 |  |  | obj_handler, obj_clear, obj_nnames, obj_name - object name support | 
| 4334 |  |  | .SH | 
| 4335 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 4336 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4337 |  |  | .B int | 
| 4338 |  |  | obj_handler( | 
| 4339 |  |  | .B int | 
| 4340 |  |  | argc, | 
| 4341 |  |  | .B char | 
| 4342 |  |  | **argv ) | 
| 4343 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4344 |  |  | .B void | 
| 4345 |  |  | obj_clear( | 
| 4346 |  |  | .B void | 
| 4347 |  |  | ) | 
| 4348 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4349 |  |  | .B "extern int" | 
| 4350 |  |  | obj_nnames | 
| 4351 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4352 |  |  | .B "extern char" | 
| 4353 |  |  | **obj_name | 
| 4354 |  |  | .SH | 
| 4355 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 4356 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4357 |  |  | The | 
| 4358 |  |  | .I obj_handler | 
| 4359 |  |  | routine should be assigned to the | 
| 4360 |  |  | .I MG_E_OBJECT | 
| 4361 |  |  | entry of the parser's | 
| 4362 |  |  | .I mg_ehand | 
| 4363 |  |  | array prior to calling | 
| 4364 |  |  | .I mg_load | 
| 4365 |  |  | if the loader/translator wishes to support hierarchical object | 
| 4366 |  |  | names. | 
| 4367 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4368 |  |  | The | 
| 4369 |  |  | .I obj_clear | 
| 4370 |  |  | function may be used to clear the object name stack and free any | 
| 4371 |  |  | associated memory, but this is usually not necessary since | 
| 4372 |  |  | .UL o | 
| 4373 |  |  | begin and end entities are normally balanced in the input. | 
| 4374 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4375 |  |  | The global | 
| 4376 |  |  | .I obj_nnames | 
| 4377 |  |  | variable indicates the number of names currently in the object | 
| 4378 |  |  | stack, and the | 
| 4379 |  |  | .I obj_name | 
| 4380 |  |  | list contains the name strings in the same order as they were | 
| 4381 |  |  | encountered on the input. | 
| 4382 |  |  | (I.e. the most recently pushed name is last.)\0 | 
| 4383 |  |  | .SH | 
| 4384 |  |  | DIAGNOSTICS | 
| 4385 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4386 |  |  | The | 
| 4387 |  |  | .I obj_handler | 
| 4388 |  |  | function returns | 
| 4389 |  |  | .I MG_OK | 
| 4390 |  |  | (0) if the color is handled correctly, or one of the predefined | 
| 4391 |  |  | error values if there is a problem. | 
| 4392 |  |  | (See the | 
| 4393 |  |  | .I mg_load | 
| 4394 |  |  | page for a list of errors.)\0 | 
| 4395 |  |  | .SH | 
| 4396 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 4397 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4398 |  |  | mg_init, mg_load, xf_handler | 
| 4399 |  |  | .ds RH XF_HANDLER | 
| 4400 |  |  | .bp | 
| 4401 |  |  | .SH | 
| 4402 |  |  | NAME | 
| 4403 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4404 |  |  | xf_handler, xf_clear, xf_context, xf_argend - transformation support | 
| 4405 |  |  | .SH | 
| 4406 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 4407 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4408 |  |  | .B int | 
| 4409 |  |  | xf_handler( | 
| 4410 |  |  | .B int | 
| 4411 |  |  | argc, | 
| 4412 |  |  | .B char | 
| 4413 |  |  | **argv ) | 
| 4414 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4415 |  |  | .B void | 
| 4416 |  |  | xf_clear( | 
| 4417 |  |  | .B void | 
| 4418 |  |  | ) | 
| 4419 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4420 |  |  | .B extern | 
| 4421 |  |  | XF_SPEC *xf_context | 
| 4422 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4423 |  |  | .B "extern char" | 
| 4424 |  |  | **xf_argend | 
| 4425 |  |  | .SH | 
| 4426 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 4427 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4428 |  |  | The | 
| 4429 |  |  | .I xf_handler | 
| 4430 |  |  | routine should be assigned to the | 
| 4431 |  |  | .I MG_E_XF | 
| 4432 |  |  | entry of the parser's | 
| 4433 |  |  | .I mg_ehand | 
| 4434 |  |  | array prior to calling | 
| 4435 |  |  | .I mg_load | 
| 4436 |  |  | if the loader/translator wishes to support hierarchical | 
| 4437 |  |  | transformations. | 
| 4438 |  |  | (Note that all MGF geometric entities require this support.)\0 | 
| 4439 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4440 |  |  | The | 
| 4441 |  |  | .I xf_clear | 
| 4442 |  |  | function may be used to clear the transform stack and free any | 
| 4443 |  |  | associated memory, but this is usually not necessary since | 
| 4444 |  |  | .UL xf | 
| 4445 |  |  | begin and end entities are normally balanced in the input. | 
| 4446 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4447 |  |  | The global | 
| 4448 |  |  | .I xf_context | 
| 4449 |  |  | variable points to the current transformation context, which is of | 
| 4450 |  |  | the type | 
| 4451 |  |  | .I XF_SPEC, | 
| 4452 |  |  | described in "parser.h": | 
| 4453 |  |  | .DS | 
| 4454 |  |  | typedef struct xf_spec { | 
| 4455 |  |  | long    xid;                            /* unique transform id */ | 
| 4456 |  |  | short   xac;                            /* context argument count */ | 
| 4457 |  |  | short   rev;                            /* boolean true if vertices reversed */ | 
| 4458 |  |  | XF      xf;                             /* cumulative transformation */ | 
| 4459 |  |  | struct xf_array *xarr;          /* transformation array pointer */ | 
| 4460 |  |  | struct xf_spec  *prev;  /* previous transformation context */ | 
| 4461 |  |  | } XF_SPEC;              /* followed by argument buffer */ | 
| 4462 |  |  | .DE | 
| 4463 |  |  | The | 
| 4464 |  |  | .I xid | 
| 4465 |  |  | member is a identifier associated with this transformation, | 
| 4466 |  |  | which should be the same for identical transformations, as an aid to | 
| 4467 |  |  | vertex sharing. | 
| 4468 |  |  | (See also the | 
| 4469 |  |  | .I c_hvertex | 
| 4470 |  |  | page.)\0 | 
| 4471 |  |  | The | 
| 4472 |  |  | .I xac | 
| 4473 |  |  | member indicates the total number of transform arguments, and is | 
| 4474 |  |  | used to indicate the position of the first argument relative to the | 
| 4475 |  |  | last one pointed to by the global | 
| 4476 |  |  | .I xf_argend | 
| 4477 |  |  | variable. | 
| 4478 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4479 |  |  | The first transform argument starts at | 
| 4480 |  |  | .I xf_argv, | 
| 4481 |  |  | which is a macro defined in "parser.h" as: | 
| 4482 |  |  | .DS | 
| 4483 |  |  | #define xf_argv         (xf_argend - xf_context->xac) | 
| 4484 |  |  | .DE | 
| 4485 |  |  | Note that accessing this macro will result in a segmentation violation | 
| 4486 |  |  | if the current context is NULL, so one should first test the second macro | 
| 4487 |  |  | .I xf_argc | 
| 4488 |  |  | against zero. | 
| 4489 |  |  | This macro is defined as: | 
| 4490 |  |  | .DS | 
| 4491 |  |  | #define xf_argc         (xf_context==NULL ? 0 : xf_context->xac) | 
| 4492 |  |  | .DE | 
| 4493 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4494 |  |  | Normally, neither of these macros will be used, since there are | 
| 4495 |  |  | routines for transforming points, vectors and scalars directly based | 
| 4496 |  |  | on the current transformation context. | 
| 4497 |  |  | (See the | 
| 4498 |  |  | .I xf_xfmpoint | 
| 4499 |  |  | page for details.)\0 | 
| 4500 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4501 |  |  | The | 
| 4502 |  |  | .I rev | 
| 4503 |  |  | member of the | 
| 4504 |  |  | .I XF_SPEC | 
| 4505 |  |  | structure indicates whether or not this transform reverses the order | 
| 4506 |  |  | of polygon vertices. | 
| 4507 |  |  | This member will be 1 if the transformation mirrors about an odd | 
| 4508 |  |  | number of coordinate axes, thus inverting faces. | 
| 4509 |  |  | The usual thing to do in this circumstance is to interpret the | 
| 4510 |  |  | vertex arguments in the reverse order, so as to bring the face back | 
| 4511 |  |  | to its original orientation in the new position. | 
| 4512 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4513 |  |  | The | 
| 4514 |  |  | .I xf | 
| 4515 |  |  | member contains the transformation scalefactor (in xf.sca) | 
| 4516 |  |  | and 4x4 homogeneous matrix (in xf.xfm), but these will usually not | 
| 4517 |  |  | be accessed directly. | 
| 4518 |  |  | Likewise, the | 
| 4519 |  |  | .I xarr | 
| 4520 |  |  | and | 
| 4521 |  |  | .I prev | 
| 4522 |  |  | members point to data that should not be needed by the calling | 
| 4523 |  |  | program. | 
| 4524 |  |  | .SH | 
| 4525 |  |  | DIAGNOSTICS | 
| 4526 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4527 |  |  | The | 
| 4528 |  |  | .I xf_handler | 
| 4529 |  |  | function returns | 
| 4530 |  |  | .I MG_OK | 
| 4531 |  |  | (0) if the color is handled correctly, or one of the predefined | 
| 4532 |  |  | error values if there is a problem. | 
| 4533 |  |  | (See the | 
| 4534 |  |  | .I mg_load | 
| 4535 |  |  | page for a list of errors.)\0 | 
| 4536 |  |  | .SH | 
| 4537 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 4538 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4539 |  |  | mg_init, mg_load, obj_handler, xf_xfmpoint | 
| 4540 |  |  | .ds RH XF_XFMPOINT | 
| 4541 |  |  | .bp | 
| 4542 |  |  | .SH | 
| 4543 |  |  | NAME | 
| 4544 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4545 | greg | 1.3 | xf_xfmpoint, xf_xfmvect, xf_rotvect, xf_scale - apply current | 
| 4546 | greg | 1.1 | transformation | 
| 4547 |  |  | .SH | 
| 4548 |  |  | SYNOPSIS | 
| 4549 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4550 |  |  | .B void | 
| 4551 |  |  | xf_xfmpoint( FVECT pnew, FVECT pold ) | 
| 4552 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4553 |  |  | .B void | 
| 4554 |  |  | xf_xfmvect( FVECT vnew, FVECT vold ) | 
| 4555 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4556 |  |  | .B void | 
| 4557 |  |  | xf_rotvect( FVECT nnew, FVECT nold ) | 
| 4558 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4559 |  |  | .B double | 
| 4560 |  |  | xf_scale( | 
| 4561 |  |  | .B double | 
| 4562 |  |  | sold ) | 
| 4563 |  |  | .SH | 
| 4564 |  |  | DESCRIPTION | 
| 4565 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4566 |  |  | The | 
| 4567 |  |  | .I xf_xfmpoint | 
| 4568 |  |  | routine applies the current transformation defined by | 
| 4569 |  |  | .I xf_context | 
| 4570 |  |  | to the point | 
| 4571 |  |  | .I pold, | 
| 4572 |  |  | scaling, rotating and moving it to its proper location, which is put in | 
| 4573 |  |  | .I pnew. | 
| 4574 | greg | 1.2 | (As for | 
| 4575 |  |  | .I xf_xfmvect | 
| 4576 |  |  | and | 
| 4577 |  |  | .I xf_rotvect, | 
| 4578 |  |  | the two arguments may point to the same vector.)\0 | 
| 4579 | greg | 1.1 | .LP | 
| 4580 |  |  | The | 
| 4581 |  |  | .I xf_xfmvect | 
| 4582 |  |  | routine applies the current transformation to the vector | 
| 4583 |  |  | .I vold, | 
| 4584 |  |  | scaling and rotating it to its proper location, which is put in | 
| 4585 |  |  | .I vnew. | 
| 4586 |  |  | The only difference between | 
| 4587 |  |  | .I xf_xfmpoint | 
| 4588 |  |  | and | 
| 4589 |  |  | .I xf_xfmvect | 
| 4590 |  |  | is that in the latter, the final translation is not applied. | 
| 4591 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4592 |  |  | The | 
| 4593 |  |  | .I xf_rotvect | 
| 4594 |  |  | routine rotates the vector | 
| 4595 |  |  | .I nold | 
| 4596 |  |  | using the current transformation, and stores the result in | 
| 4597 |  |  | .I nnew. | 
| 4598 |  |  | No translation or scaling is applied, which is the appropriate | 
| 4599 |  |  | action for surface normal vectors for example. | 
| 4600 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4601 |  |  | The | 
| 4602 |  |  | .I xf_scale | 
| 4603 |  |  | function takes a scalar argument | 
| 4604 |  |  | .I sold | 
| 4605 |  |  | and applies the current scale factor, returning the result. | 
| 4606 |  |  | .SH | 
| 4607 |  |  | SEE ALSO | 
| 4608 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4609 |  |  | xf_handler | 
| 4610 |  |  | .ds LH | 
| 4611 |  |  | .ds RH | 
| 4612 |  |  | .bp | 
| 4613 |  |  | .NH | 
| 4614 |  |  | Application Notes | 
| 4615 |  |  | .NH 2 | 
| 4616 |  |  | Relation to Standard Practices in Computer Graphics | 
| 4617 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4618 |  |  | For those coming from a computer graphics background, some of the | 
| 4619 |  |  | choices in the material model may seem strange or even capricious. | 
| 4620 |  |  | Why not simply stick with RGB colors and a Phong specular component | 
| 4621 |  |  | like everyone else? | 
| 4622 |  |  | What is the point in choosing the number of sides to a material? | 
| 4623 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4624 |  |  | In the real world, a surface can have only one side, | 
| 4625 |  |  | defining the interface between one volume and another. | 
| 4626 |  |  | Many object-space rendering packages (e.g. z-buffer algorithms) take | 
| 4627 |  |  | advantage of this fact by culling back-facing polygons and thus saving | 
| 4628 |  |  | as much as 50% of the preprocessing time. | 
| 4629 |  |  | However, many models rely on an | 
| 4630 |  |  | approximation whereby a single surface is used to represent a very thin | 
| 4631 |  |  | volume, such as a pane of glass, and this also can provide significant | 
| 4632 |  |  | calculational savings in an image-space algorithm (such as | 
| 4633 |  |  | ray-tracing). | 
| 4634 |  |  | Also, many models are created in such a way that the front vs. back | 
| 4635 |  |  | information is lost or confused, so that the back side of one or | 
| 4636 |  |  | more surfaces may have to serve as the front side during rendering. | 
| 4637 |  |  | (AutoCAD is one easily identified culprit in this department.)\0 | 
| 4638 |  |  | Since both types of surface models are useful and any | 
| 4639 |  |  | rendering algorithm may ultimately be applied, MGF provides a way | 
| 4640 |  |  | to specify sidedness rather than picking one interpretation or the other. | 
| 4641 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4642 |  |  | The problem with RGB is that there is no accepted standard, and even | 
| 4643 |  |  | if we were to set one it would either be impossible to realize (i.e. | 
| 4644 |  |  | impossible to create phosphors with the chosen colors) or it would | 
| 4645 |  |  | have a gamut that excludes many saturated colors. | 
| 4646 |  |  | The CIE color system was very carefully conceived and developed, | 
| 4647 |  |  | and is the standard to which all photometric measurements adhere. | 
| 4648 |  |  | It is therefore the logical choice in any standard format, though it | 
| 4649 |  |  | has been too often ignored by the computer graphics community. | 
| 4650 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4651 |  |  | Regarding Phong shading, this was never a physical model and making it | 
| 4652 |  |  | behave basic laws of reciprocity and energy balance is difficult. | 
| 4653 |  |  | More to the point, specular power has almost nothing to do with | 
| 4654 |  |  | surface microstructure, and is difficult to set properly | 
| 4655 |  |  | even if every physical characteristic of a material has | 
| 4656 |  |  | been carefully measured. | 
| 4657 |  |  | This is the ultimate indictment of any physical model -- that it | 
| 4658 |  |  | is incapable of reproducing any measurement whatsoever. | 
| 4659 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4660 |  |  | Admittedly, the compliment of diffuse and specular component plus | 
| 4661 |  |  | surface roughness and index of refraction used in MGF is less than a | 
| 4662 |  |  | perfect model, but it is serviceable for most materials and | 
| 4663 |  |  | relatively simple to incorporate into a rendering algorithm. | 
| 4664 |  |  | In the long term, MGF shall probably include full spectral | 
| 4665 |  |  | scattering functions, though the sheer quantity of data involved | 
| 4666 |  |  | makes this burdensome from both the measurement side and the | 
| 4667 |  |  | simulation side. | 
| 4668 |  |  | .NH 3 | 
| 4669 |  |  | Converting between Phong Specular Power and Gaussian Roughness | 
| 4670 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4671 |  |  | So-called specular reflection and transmission are modeled using a | 
| 4672 |  |  | Gaussian distribution of surface facets. | 
| 4673 |  |  | The roughness parameters to the | 
| 4674 |  |  | .UL rs | 
| 4675 |  |  | and | 
| 4676 |  |  | .UL ts | 
| 4677 |  |  | entities specify | 
| 4678 |  |  | the root-mean-squared (RMS) surface facet slope, which varies from 0 | 
| 4679 |  |  | for a perfectly smooth surface to around .2 for a fairly rough one. | 
| 4680 |  |  | The effect this will have on the reflected component distribution is | 
| 4681 |  |  | well-defined, but predicting the behavior of the transmitted | 
| 4682 |  |  | component requires further assumptions. | 
| 4683 |  |  | We assume that the surface | 
| 4684 |  |  | scatters light passing through it just as much as it scatters | 
| 4685 |  |  | reflected light. | 
| 4686 |  |  | This assumption is approximately correct for a | 
| 4687 |  |  | two-sided transparent material with an index of refraction of 1.5 | 
| 4688 |  |  | (like glass) and both sides having the given RMS facet slope. | 
| 4689 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4690 |  |  | Oftentimes, one is translating from a Phong exponent on the cosine | 
| 4691 |  |  | of the half-vector-to-normal angle to the more physical but less | 
| 4692 |  |  | familiar Gaussian model of MGF. | 
| 4693 |  |  | The hardest part is translating the specular power to a roughness value. | 
| 4694 |  |  | For this, we recommend the following approximation: | 
| 4695 |  |  | .IP | 
| 4696 | greg | 1.15 | roughness = sqrt(2/specular_power) | 
| 4697 | greg | 1.1 | .LP | 
| 4698 |  |  | It is not a perfect correlation, but it is about as close as one can get. | 
| 4699 |  |  | .NH 3 | 
| 4700 |  |  | Converting between RGB and CIE Colors | 
| 4701 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4702 |  |  | Unlike most graphics languages, MGF does not use an RGB color model, | 
| 4703 |  |  | simply because there is no recognized definition for this model. | 
| 4704 |  |  | It is based on computer monitor phosphors, which vary from one | 
| 4705 |  |  | CRT to the next. | 
| 4706 |  |  | (There is an RGB standard defined in the TV | 
| 4707 |  |  | industry, but this has a rather poor correlation to most computer | 
| 4708 |  |  | monitors and it is impossible to express many real-world colors | 
| 4709 |  |  | within its limited gamut.)\0 | 
| 4710 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4711 |  |  | MGF uses two alternative, well-defined standards, spectral power | 
| 4712 |  |  | distributions and the 1931 CIE 2 degree standard observer. | 
| 4713 |  |  | With the CIE standard, any viewable | 
| 4714 |  |  | color may be exactly represented as an (x,y) chromaticity value. | 
| 4715 |  |  | Unfortunately, the interaction between | 
| 4716 |  |  | colors (i.e. colored light sources and interreflections) cannot be | 
| 4717 |  |  | specified exactly with any finite coordinate set, including CIE | 
| 4718 |  |  | chromaticities. | 
| 4719 |  |  | So, MGF offers the ability to give reflectance, | 
| 4720 |  |  | transmittance or emittance as a function of wavelength over the visible | 
| 4721 |  |  | spectrum. | 
| 4722 |  |  | This function is still discretized, but at a user-selectable | 
| 4723 |  |  | resolution. | 
| 4724 |  |  | Furthermore, spectral colors may be mixed, providing (nearly) | 
| 4725 |  |  | arbitrary basis functions, which can produce more accurate results in | 
| 4726 |  |  | some cases and are merely a convenience for translation in others. | 
| 4727 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4728 |  |  | Conversion back and forth between CIE chromaticity coordinates and spectral | 
| 4729 |  |  | samples is provided within the MGF parser. | 
| 4730 |  |  | Unfortunately, conversion | 
| 4731 |  |  | to and from RGB values depends on a particular RGB definition, and as we | 
| 4732 |  |  | have said, there is no recognized standard. | 
| 4733 |  |  | We therefore recommend that | 
| 4734 |  |  | you decide yourself what chromaticity values to use for each RGB primary, | 
| 4735 |  |  | and adopt the following code to convert between CIE and RGB coordinates. | 
| 4736 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4737 |  |  | .nf | 
| 4738 |  |  | #ifdef  NTSC | 
| 4739 |  |  | #define  CIE_x_r                0.670           /* standard NTSC primaries */ | 
| 4740 |  |  | #define  CIE_y_r                0.330 | 
| 4741 |  |  | #define  CIE_x_g                0.210 | 
| 4742 |  |  | #define  CIE_y_g                0.710 | 
| 4743 |  |  | #define  CIE_x_b                0.140 | 
| 4744 |  |  | #define  CIE_y_b                0.080 | 
| 4745 |  |  | #define  CIE_x_w                0.3333          /* monitor white point */ | 
| 4746 |  |  | #define  CIE_y_w                0.3333 | 
| 4747 |  |  | #else | 
| 4748 |  |  | #define  CIE_x_r                0.640           /* nominal CRT primaries */ | 
| 4749 |  |  | #define  CIE_y_r                0.330 | 
| 4750 |  |  | #define  CIE_x_g                0.290 | 
| 4751 |  |  | #define  CIE_y_g                0.600 | 
| 4752 |  |  | #define  CIE_x_b                0.150 | 
| 4753 |  |  | #define  CIE_y_b                0.060 | 
| 4754 |  |  | #define  CIE_x_w                0.3333          /* monitor white point */ | 
| 4755 |  |  | #define  CIE_y_w                0.3333 | 
| 4756 |  |  | #endif | 
| 4757 |  |  |  | 
| 4758 | greg | 1.4 | #define CIE_D           (       CIE_x_r*(CIE_y_g - CIE_y_b) + \\ | 
| 4759 |  |  | CIE_x_g*(CIE_y_b - CIE_y_r) + \\ | 
| 4760 | greg | 1.1 | CIE_x_b*(CIE_y_r - CIE_y_g)     ) | 
| 4761 | greg | 1.4 | #define CIE_C_rD        ( (1./CIE_y_w) * \\ | 
| 4762 |  |  | ( CIE_x_w*(CIE_y_g - CIE_y_b) - \\ | 
| 4763 |  |  | CIE_y_w*(CIE_x_g - CIE_x_b) + \\ | 
| 4764 | greg | 1.1 | CIE_x_g*CIE_y_b - CIE_x_b*CIE_y_g     ) ) | 
| 4765 | greg | 1.4 | #define CIE_C_gD        ( (1./CIE_y_w) * \\ | 
| 4766 |  |  | ( CIE_x_w*(CIE_y_b - CIE_y_r) - \\ | 
| 4767 |  |  | CIE_y_w*(CIE_x_b - CIE_x_r) - \\ | 
| 4768 | greg | 1.1 | CIE_x_r*CIE_y_b + CIE_x_b*CIE_y_r     ) ) | 
| 4769 | greg | 1.4 | #define CIE_C_bD        ( (1./CIE_y_w) * \\ | 
| 4770 |  |  | ( CIE_x_w*(CIE_y_r - CIE_y_g) - \\ | 
| 4771 |  |  | CIE_y_w*(CIE_x_r - CIE_x_g) + \\ | 
| 4772 | greg | 1.1 | CIE_x_r*CIE_y_g - CIE_x_g*CIE_y_r     ) ) | 
| 4773 |  |  |  | 
| 4774 |  |  | #define CIE_rf          (CIE_y_r*CIE_C_rD/CIE_D) | 
| 4775 |  |  | #define CIE_gf          (CIE_y_g*CIE_C_gD/CIE_D) | 
| 4776 |  |  | #define CIE_bf          (CIE_y_b*CIE_C_bD/CIE_D) | 
| 4777 |  |  |  | 
| 4778 |  |  | float  xyz2rgbmat[3][3] = {     /* XYZ to RGB */ | 
| 4779 |  |  | {(CIE_y_g - CIE_y_b - CIE_x_b*CIE_y_g + CIE_y_b*CIE_x_g)/CIE_C_rD, | 
| 4780 |  |  | (CIE_x_b - CIE_x_g - CIE_x_b*CIE_y_g + CIE_x_g*CIE_y_b)/CIE_C_rD, | 
| 4781 |  |  | (CIE_x_g*CIE_y_b - CIE_x_b*CIE_y_g)/CIE_C_rD}, | 
| 4782 |  |  | {(CIE_y_b - CIE_y_r - CIE_y_b*CIE_x_r + CIE_y_r*CIE_x_b)/CIE_C_gD, | 
| 4783 |  |  | (CIE_x_r - CIE_x_b - CIE_x_r*CIE_y_b + CIE_x_b*CIE_y_r)/CIE_C_gD, | 
| 4784 |  |  | (CIE_x_b*CIE_y_r - CIE_x_r*CIE_y_b)/CIE_C_gD}, | 
| 4785 |  |  | {(CIE_y_r - CIE_y_g - CIE_y_r*CIE_x_g + CIE_y_g*CIE_x_r)/CIE_C_bD, | 
| 4786 |  |  | (CIE_x_g - CIE_x_r - CIE_x_g*CIE_y_r + CIE_x_r*CIE_y_g)/CIE_C_bD, | 
| 4787 |  |  | (CIE_x_r*CIE_y_g - CIE_x_g*CIE_y_r)/CIE_C_bD} | 
| 4788 |  |  | }; | 
| 4789 |  |  |  | 
| 4790 |  |  | float  rgb2xyzmat[3][3] = {     /* RGB to XYZ */ | 
| 4791 |  |  | {CIE_x_r*CIE_C_rD/CIE_D,CIE_x_g*CIE_C_gD/CIE_D,CIE_x_b*CIE_C_bD/CIE_D}, | 
| 4792 |  |  | {CIE_y_r*CIE_C_rD/CIE_D,CIE_y_g*CIE_C_gD/CIE_D,CIE_y_b*CIE_C_bD/CIE_D}, | 
| 4793 |  |  | {(1.-CIE_x_r-CIE_y_r)*CIE_C_rD/CIE_D, | 
| 4794 |  |  | (1.-CIE_x_g-CIE_y_g)*CIE_C_gD/CIE_D, | 
| 4795 |  |  | (1.-CIE_x_b-CIE_y_b)*CIE_C_bD/CIE_D} | 
| 4796 |  |  | }; | 
| 4797 |  |  |  | 
| 4798 |  |  |  | 
| 4799 |  |  | cie_rgb(rgbcolor, ciecolor)             /* convert CIE to RGB */ | 
| 4800 |  |  | register float  *rgbcolor, *ciecolor; | 
| 4801 |  |  | { | 
| 4802 |  |  | register int  i; | 
| 4803 |  |  |  | 
| 4804 |  |  | for (i = 0; i < 3; i++) { | 
| 4805 |  |  | rgbcolor[i] =   xyz2rgbmat[i][0]*ciecolor[0] + | 
| 4806 |  |  | xyz2rgbmat[i][1]*ciecolor[1] + | 
| 4807 |  |  | xyz2rgbmat[i][2]*ciecolor[2] ; | 
| 4808 |  |  | if (rgbcolor[i] < 0.0)          /* watch for negative values */ | 
| 4809 |  |  | rgbcolor[i] = 0.0; | 
| 4810 |  |  | } | 
| 4811 |  |  | } | 
| 4812 |  |  |  | 
| 4813 |  |  |  | 
| 4814 |  |  | rgb_cie(ciecolor, rgbcolor)             /* convert RGB to CIE */ | 
| 4815 |  |  | register float  *ciecolor, *rgbcolor; | 
| 4816 |  |  | { | 
| 4817 |  |  | register int  i; | 
| 4818 |  |  |  | 
| 4819 |  |  | for (i = 0; i < 3; i++) | 
| 4820 |  |  | ciecolor[i] =   rgb2xyzmat[i][0]*rgbcolor[0] + | 
| 4821 |  |  | rgb2xyzmat[i][1]*rgbcolor[1] + | 
| 4822 |  |  | rgb2xyzmat[i][2]*rgbcolor[2] ; | 
| 4823 |  |  | } | 
| 4824 |  |  | .fi | 
| 4825 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4826 |  |  | An alternative to adopting the above code is to use the MGF "cmix" | 
| 4827 |  |  | entity to convert from RGB directly by naming the three primaries in | 
| 4828 |  |  | terms of their chromaticities, e.g: | 
| 4829 |  |  | .DS | 
| 4830 |  |  | c R = | 
| 4831 |  |  | cxy 0.640 0.330 | 
| 4832 |  |  | c G = | 
| 4833 |  |  | cxy 0.290 0.600 | 
| 4834 |  |  | c B = | 
| 4835 |  |  | cxy 0.150 0.060 | 
| 4836 |  |  | .DE | 
| 4837 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4838 |  |  | Then, converting from RGB to MGF colors is as simple as multiplying each | 
| 4839 |  |  | component by its relative luminance in a cmix statement, for instance: | 
| 4840 |  |  | .DS | 
| 4841 |  |  | c white = | 
| 4842 |  |  | cmix 0.265 R 0.670 G 0.065 B | 
| 4843 |  |  | .DE | 
| 4844 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4845 |  |  | For the chosen RGB standard, the above specification would result a pure | 
| 4846 |  |  | white. | 
| 4847 |  |  | The reason the coefficients are not all 1 as you might expect is | 
| 4848 |  |  | that cmix uses relative luminance as the standard for its weights. | 
| 4849 |  |  | Since | 
| 4850 |  |  | blue is less luminous for the same energy than red, which is in turn | 
| 4851 |  |  | less luminous than green, the weights cannot be the same to achieve an | 
| 4852 |  |  | even spectral balance. | 
| 4853 |  |  | Unfortunately, computing these relative weights | 
| 4854 |  |  | is not straightforward, though it is given in the above macros as CIE_rf, | 
| 4855 |  |  | CIE_gf and CIE_bf. | 
| 4856 |  |  | (The common factors in these macros may of course | 
| 4857 |  |  | be removed since | 
| 4858 |  |  | .UL cmix | 
| 4859 |  |  | weights are all relative.)\0 | 
| 4860 |  |  | Alternatively, one could measure the actual full scale luminance of | 
| 4861 |  |  | the phosphors with a luminance probe and get the same relative | 
| 4862 |  |  | values. | 
| 4863 |  |  | .NH 2 | 
| 4864 |  |  | Relation to IESNA LM-63 and Luminaire Catalogs | 
| 4865 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4866 |  |  | Recently, the Illuminating Engineering Society of North America | 
| 4867 |  |  | (IESNA) adopted MGF as the official standard for | 
| 4868 |  |  | representing luminaire geometry and materials. | 
| 4869 |  |  | The way this works in an IES luminaire data file is through the | 
| 4870 |  |  | addition of a keyword called LUMINOUSGEOMETRY, which is given on a | 
| 4871 |  |  | line in the header portion of a file (before the TILT specification) | 
| 4872 |  |  | like so: | 
| 4873 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4874 |  |  | .B [LUMINOUSGEOMETRY] | 
| 4875 |  |  | .I mgf_file | 
| 4876 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4877 |  |  | The given MGF file must exist relative to the directory containing | 
| 4878 |  |  | the IES file (i.e. the same stipulations and restrictions on pathnames | 
| 4879 |  |  | apply as for the MGF | 
| 4880 |  |  | .UL i | 
| 4881 |  |  | entity). | 
| 4882 |  |  | Furthermore, the position of the MGF geometry must be | 
| 4883 |  |  | such that the gross geometric specification of emitting surfaces | 
| 4884 |  |  | in the IES file completely | 
| 4885 |  |  | blocks or encloses the luminous portions of the MGF description. | 
| 4886 |  |  | Specifically, any ray traced towards the MGF geometry must strike | 
| 4887 |  |  | the IES gross geometry before it strikes any luminous surface in the | 
| 4888 |  |  | MGF description. | 
| 4889 |  |  | This provides a convenient way of preventing overcounting in the | 
| 4890 |  |  | illumination calculation, while still allowing for accurate fixture | 
| 4891 |  |  | appearance. | 
| 4892 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4893 |  |  | To give two examples, let us consider first a recessed can, followed | 
| 4894 |  |  | by a hanging direct/indirect fluorescent fixture. | 
| 4895 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4896 |  |  | The most appropriate IES geometric specification for the emitting | 
| 4897 |  |  | area of a can light would be a circular disk. | 
| 4898 |  |  | Since the IES gross geometry gives only the diameter of the disk, the | 
| 4899 |  |  | actual 3-dimensional placement is implicitly defined as having a | 
| 4900 |  |  | center at the origin, with the radiating disk facing in the | 
| 4901 |  |  | negative Z direction (nadir, downwards). | 
| 4902 |  |  | The MGF geometry would then be placed such that any luminous portion | 
| 4903 |  |  | was above this disk, and no portion of it would obstruct the IES | 
| 4904 |  |  | geometry. | 
| 4905 |  |  | The most sensible position therefore has the IES disk flush with the | 
| 4906 |  |  | MGF can opening, as shown in Figure 3. | 
| 4907 |  |  | .bp | 
| 4908 |  |  | Replace this page with the second page from "figures.ps". | 
| 4909 |  |  | .bp | 
| 4910 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4911 |  |  | In the case of a direct/indirect fluorescent fixture, light will | 
| 4912 |  |  | exit both the top and the bottom sides, and the IES geometry must | 
| 4913 |  |  | enclose the radiating portion of the fixture entirely. | 
| 4914 |  |  | It is acceptable to have additional MGF geometry above the | 
| 4915 |  |  | fixture so long as it does not radiate, which is what we must do if | 
| 4916 |  |  | we wish to include the support rods, as shown in Figure 4. | 
| 4917 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4918 |  |  | Note that the origin is always in the exact center of the IES | 
| 4919 |  |  | geometry. | 
| 4920 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4921 |  |  | Not all fixtures will fit the simple IES geometry specification so | 
| 4922 |  |  | nicely. | 
| 4923 |  |  | For odd-shaped fixtures, it may be necessary to use an IES geometry | 
| 4924 |  |  | that does not match the radiating area terribly well in order that | 
| 4925 |  |  | it completely block or enclose the required MGF specification. | 
| 4926 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4927 |  |  | The unit of length in the MGF file is always meters, regardless of | 
| 4928 |  |  | the units specified in the enclosing IES file. | 
| 4929 |  |  | However, any and all multipliers applied to the candlepower data in the | 
| 4930 |  |  | IES file will also be applied to the emittance of surfaces in the | 
| 4931 |  |  | MGF specification, so that one MGF file may serve similar | 
| 4932 |  |  | luminaires that differ in their total output. | 
| 4933 |  |  | .NH | 
| 4934 |  |  | Credits | 
| 4935 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4936 |  |  | The MGF language grew out of a joint investigation into physical | 
| 4937 |  |  | representations for rendering undertaken by the author | 
| 4938 |  |  | (Greg Ward of LBL) and Holly Rushmeier of the National | 
| 4939 |  |  | Institute of Standards and Technology. | 
| 4940 |  |  | After deciding that a complete and robust specification was | 
| 4941 |  |  | an extreme challenge, we shelved the project for another time. | 
| 4942 |  |  | A few months later, the author spoke with Ian Ashdown and Robert | 
| 4943 |  |  | Shakespeare, who are both members of the IES Computing Committee, | 
| 4944 |  |  | about the need for extending the existing data standard to | 
| 4945 |  |  | include luminaire geometry and near-field photometry. | 
| 4946 |  |  | We then moved forward as a team towards a somewhat less ambitious | 
| 4947 |  |  | approach to physical materials and geometry that had the advantage | 
| 4948 |  |  | of simplicity and the possibility of support with a standard parser | 
| 4949 |  |  | library. | 
| 4950 |  |  | The author went to work over the next two months | 
| 4951 |  |  | on the detailed design of the language | 
| 4952 |  |  | and an ANSI-C parser, with regular feedback from the other three | 
| 4953 |  |  | team members. | 
| 4954 |  |  | Several months and several versions later, we arrived at release | 
| 4955 |  |  | 1.0, which is the occasion of this document's creation. | 
| 4956 |  |  | .LP | 
| 4957 |  |  | Funding for this work... would be nice. |